Som PDF
Som PDF
Som PDF
Reference: Search
Topics Below are additional and supplementary to the course
Topic 7: Columns & Pressure Vessels
Topic 4: Beams I
4.1 Shear Forces and Bending Moments I
4.2 Shear Forces and Bending Moments II
4.3 Shear Forces and Bending Moments Examples
4.3a Simply Supported Beam - Example 1
4.3b Simply Supported Beam - Example 2
4.3c Cantilever Beam - Example 3
Additional examples: (simply supported) #4, #5, #6, #7, #8, #9 [Previous test
problems]
Additional examples: (cantilever) #4, #5, #6, #7, #8, #9 [Previous test problems]
4.4a1 Shear Force/Bending Moment Problems - Simply Supported Beams 1
[supplementary]
except#5]
5.6d Beams - Problem Assignment 4 - Bending & Shear Stress [required, except #5]
7.6c Columns & Buckling - Topic Examination (with thin wall pressure vessel problem)
1.1b. Vectors:
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/StatI/stat1.htm (1 of 2)6/28/2005 1:47:35 PM
The student should have a working knowledge of vectors (as, of course, forces are
vectors and we will be summing forces in many of our problems.) A working
knowledge of vectors would include vector addition, subtraction and resolving
vectors into perpendicular components. We will be using the component method for
vector addition. For a short review of this method see: Basic Vector Review. Also,
Vector Review Problems are available.
1. Law of Cosines:
C2 = A2 + B2 - 2AB cos c
2. Law of Sines:
(A/sin a) = (B/sin b) = (C/sin c)
Where A,B,C are length of the sides, and a, b, c are the corresponding angles
opposite the sides.
Return to:
Topic 1.1: Algebra/Trigonometry/Vectors
continue to: Problem Assignment - Trigonometry
or select
Topic 1: Statics I - Principles Table of Contents
Statics & Strength of Materials - Course Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
Strength of Materials
Problem Assignment - Trigonometry
1. A 40 ft long ladder leaning against a wall makes an angle of 60 with the ground.
Determine the vertical height to which the ladder will reach. (answers at bottom of
problem set.)
2. In the roof truss shown, the bottom chord members AD and DC have lengths of 18ft.
and 36ft respectively. The height BD is 14 ft. Determine the lengths of the top chords AB
and BC and find the angles at A and C.
3. One side of a triangular lot is 150 ft. and the angle opposite this side is 55. Another
angle is 63. Sketch the shape of the lot and determine how much fencing is needed to
enclose it.
4. An Egyptian pyramid has a square base and symmetrical sloping faces. The inclination
of a sloping face is 42 08'. At a distance of 500 ft. from the base, on level ground the
angle of inclination to the apex is 25 15'. Find the vertical height(h), the slant height of
the pyramid, and the width of the pyramid at its base.
#5. Triangle ABC shown is a triangular tract of land. The one acre tract DEFG is to be
subdivided. AE is 500ft and DC is 300 ft. Determine the lengths of DG and CB. [This is a
harder problem and may be skipped.]
2. Vector Addition:
Vector addition may be done several ways including, Graphical Method,
Trigonometric Method, and Component Method. We will be reviewing only the
Component Method, as that is the method which will be used in the course. Other
methods are detailed in your textbook.
Three ropes are tied to a small metal ring. At the end of each rope three students
are pulling, each trying to move the ring in their direction. If we look down from
above the students, the forces and directions they are applying the forces are as
follows: (See diagram to the right)
Find the net (resultant) force (magnitude and direction) on the ring due to the
three applied forces.
Choose origin, sketch coordinate system and vectors (done above)
Resolve vectors into x & y components (See Diagram)
Ax = 30 lb cos 37o = + 24.0 lbs ; Ay = 30 lb sin 37o = + 18.1 lb
Bx = 50 lb cos135o = - 35.4 lbs ; By = 50 lb sin135o = + 35.4 lb
Cx = 80 lb cos240o = - 40.0 lbs ; Cy = 80 lb sin240o = - 69.3 lb
Thus the resultant force on the ring is 53.8 pounds acting at an angle of 197.1
degrees.
c) 15 ft at 237o
b) 27# at 63o
d) 18 ft at -39o
2. Find the vectors (magnitude and direction) that have the following
components.
a) x = 5 feet y = 17 feet; b) x = -8 # y = 3 #; c)x = 3# y = -8#; d)x =
13ft = -24ft
3. Solve the following vector problems by adding vectors A and B to find
the resultant vector for problems a,b, and c. (Answers at bottom of page.)
(a).
(b).
(c).
4. Add vectors A, B, and C and find the resultant vector for problems a,b,c,
and d.
(a).
(b).
(c).
(d).
a) R = 2 * A - B + 3 * C
b) R = -3 * A + 2 * B - C
Some Answers:
3a. Rx = -12.57 lb., Ry = 52.83 lb., R = 54.3 lb at 103.4o
3b. Rx = -15.16 n., Ry = -7.11n., R = 16.74 n at 205o
3c. Rx = 12.31 ft/s, Ry = -39.51 ft/s, R = 41.38 ft/s at 287.3o
4a. Rx = -4.54 m., Ry = 1.61 m., R = 4.82 m. at 160.5o
4b. Rx = 6.46 n., Ry = -35.11 n., R = 35.7 n at 280.4o
4c. Rx = -1.16 ft/s., Ry = -9.5 ft/s., R = 9.57 n at 263o
4d. Rx = 16.39 lb., Ry = 164.13 lb., R = 164.95 lb. at 84.3o
5a. Rx = 14.99 m., Ry = - 1.45 m., R = 15.07 m. at 354o.
5b. Rx = -10.62 m., Ry = 12.12 m., R = 16.11 m. at 131o.
That is, forces in the x-direction must sum to zero, for translational equilibrium in
the x-direction, and, the forces in the y-direction must sum to zero, for
translational equilibrium in the y-direction, and, the forces in the z-direction must
sum to zero, for translational equilibrium in the z-direction.
To see the application of the first condition of equilibrium and also the application
of a standard problem solving technique, let's look carefully at introductory
examples. Select: Example 1- Concurrent Forces.
Select: Example 2- Concurrent Forces
If we examine the first diagram for a moment we observe this problem may be
classified as a problem involving Concurrent, Coplanar Forces. That is, the
vectors representing the two support forces in Cable 1 and Cable 2, and the vector
representing the load force will all intersect at one point, just above the body.
When the force vectors all intersect at one point, the forces are said to be
Concurrent. Additionally, we note that this is a two-dimensional problem, that
forces lie in the x-y plane only. When the problem involves forces in two
dimensions only, the forces are said to be Coplanar.
(Notice in this problem, that since the two supporting members are cables, and
cables can only be in tension, the directions the support forces act are easy to
determine. In later problems this will not necessarily be the case, and will be
discussed later.)
3. Apply the Equilibrium Conditions and solve for unknowns. In this step we
will now apply the actual equilibrium equations. Since the problem is in two
dimensions only (coplanar) we have the following two equilibrium conditions: The
sum of the forces in the x direction, and the sum of the forces in the y direction
must be zero. We now place our forces into these equations, remembering to put
the correct sign with the force, that is if the force acts in the positive direction it is
positive and if the force acts in the negative direction, it is negative in the
equation.
or, -100 cos 40o + 100 cos 40o = 0 (Just as we would expect, the xforces balance each other.)
(Notice in this problem, that since the two supporting members are cables, and
cables can only be in tension, the directions the support forces act are easy to
determine. In later problems this will not necessarily be the case, and will be
discussed later.)
To "Solve" this problem, that is to determine the forces (tensions) in cable 1 and
cable 2, we will now follow a very specific procedure or technique, as follows:
1. Draw a Free Body Diagram (FBD) of the structure or a portion of the
structure. This Free Body Diagram should include a coordinate system and vectors
representing all the external forces (which include support forces and load forces)
acting on the structure. These forces should be labeled either with actual known
values or symbols representing unknown forces. Diagram 2 is the Free Body
Diagram of point C with all forces acting on point C shown and labeled.
Since the components of T1 and T2 (T1 sin 53o, T1 cos 53o, T2 sin 30o, T2 cos
30o) are equivalent to T1 and T2, in the final diagram 1d, we remove T1 and T2
which are now represented by their components. Notice that we do not have to do
this for the load force of 500 lb., since it is already acting in the y-direction only.
3. Apply the Equilibrium Conditions and solve for unknowns. In this step we
will now apply the actual equilibrium equations. Since the problem is in two
dimensions only (coplanar) we have the following two equilibrium conditions: The
sum of the forces in the x direction, and the sum of the forces in the y direction
must be zero. We now place our forces into these equations, remembering to put
the correct sign with the force, that is if the force acts in the positive direction it is
positive and if the force acts in the negative direction, it is negative in the
equation.
or, T1 cos53o - T2 cos30o = 0
or, T1 sin53o + T2 sin30o - 500 lb= 0
Notice we have two equations and two unknowns (T1 and T2), and therefore can
solve for the unknowns. There are several ways to solve these two 'simultaneous'
equations. We could solve the first equation for T1 in terms of T2, (T1 = T2 cos
30o/cos 53o), and substitute the expression for T1 into the second equation [(T2
cos30o/cos53o)sin53o + T2 sin30o - 500 lb= 0], giving us only one equation and
one unknown.
On solving the equations for T1 and T2 we obtain: T1 = 436 lb.; T2 = 302 lb.
Thus, if the structure is to be in equilibrium, if the cables, acting at the angles
given, are to support the 500 lb. load, then the forces in the cable must be as
found above, 436 lb. and 302 lb., respectively. So when we go to purchase cables
for our structure, we must be sure they will support loads at least equal to the
tensions we found.
1. Calculate the force in cable AB and the angle q for the support system
shown. (447.2 lb. 63.4o)
3. Calculate the force in each cable for the suspended weight shown. (439
lb., 538 lb.)
4. Two forces of 100 lb. each act on a body at an angle of 120o with each
other. What is the weight of the body the two forces are supporting?
(100 lb.)
5. A wire 24 inches long will stand a straight pull of 100 lb. The ends are
fastened to two points 21 inches apart on the same level. What weight
suspended from the middle of the wire will break it? (96.8 lb.)
6. Calculate the reactions of the two smooth inclined planes against the
cylinder shown. The cylinder weighs 150 lbs. (79.8 lb., 102.6 lb.)
The second condition for equilibrium states that if we are to have rotational
equilibrium, the sum of the Torque acting on the structure must be zero. Torque
(or Moments) is normally covered in the first semester of a General College
Physics course. (For an overview and review of Torque, please select: Subtopic
1.31 Torque)
The 2nd condition for equilibrium may be written:
or in three dimensions:
,
Since, most of our problems will be dealing with structures in two dimensions, our
The direction of the torque vector is perpendicular to both the distance and force
vectors, and is given by the right hand rule. There are a variety of ways of
expressing the right hand rule. In this case it could be expressed this way. If
vector R were a rod, pinned at the origin, notice that force component
would cause R to start to rotate counterclockwise about the origin. If we now curl
the fingers of our right hand in the same way as the rotation, our thumb will point
the direction or the torque vector - in this case, out of the screen. (+ z direction.)
If this all seems confusing at this point, don't panic. We will use a somewhat less
formal approach to determining torque acting on structures, as shown in the
following example(s).
In diagram 3b, we have moved the 100 lb. force to halfway down the beam
toward point P, and so the perpendicular distance is changed to 5 ft., and the
torque due to the 100 lb. force with respect to point P now becomes: Torque = F
x d = 100 lb. x 5 ft. = 500 ft-lb.
In diagram 3c, we have moved the 100 lb. force three quarters length down the
beam toward point P, and so the perpendicular distance is now 2.5 ft., and the
torque due to the 100 lb. force with respect to point P now becomes: Torque = F
x d = 100 lb. x 2.5 ft. = 250 ft-lb.
Finally in diagram 3d, the 100 lb. force acts directly below point P, and so the
perpendicular distance is 0 ft, and therefore there is zero torque due to the 100 lb.
force with respect to point P. This does not mean the 100 lb. force does not push
on point P, it does, however it produces no torque (no rotation) with respect to
point P.
Example 2: In this example we use the same beam as above but now the 100 lb.
force acts at an angle of 37o with respect to the horizontal (below) as shown in
diagram 4.
Once again we wish to calculate the torque produced by the 100 lb. force with
respect to point P. We will first do this directly from our less formal definition of
Notice in Diagram 4a, we have extended the line of action of the force, and then
we have started at point P and drawn a line from point P which intersects the force
line at 90o. This is the perpendicular distance 'd' from the pivot point to the line of
the force. We can find the value of the perpendicular distance d by noting that the
force, perpendicular distance d, and beam length form a right triangle with the
beam length as the hypotenuse. Therefore from trigonometry, d = 10 sin 37o =
6 ft, and the torque will be: Torque = 100 lb. x 6 ft = 600 ft-lb. (Positive
torque, since if the beam were actually pinned at point P, the 100 lb. force would
start the beam rotating in the counterclockwise direction.)
While this method of calculating the torque is fine and does work, it actually is
more effective in problems, certainly in problems with a number of forces, to first
break the force into it's equivalent x and y-components before calculating torque.
This is the process we will normally use, and we have shown this process in
Diagram 4b.
We first found the x and y-components of the 100 lb. force as shown in the
diagram. Then the resultant torque about point P will be the sum of the torque
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/StatI/stat131.htm (4 of 5)6/28/2005 1:49:34 PM
Notice in the diagram to the right, we have shown the forces in the cables
supporting the beam as arrows upward, and labeled these forces TA and TB.
2. Resolve all forces into x and y-components. In this example, all the forces
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/StatI/state13a.htm (1 of 3)6/28/2005 1:49:42 PM
are already acting in the y-direction only, so nothing more needs to be done.
3. Apply the (2-dimensional) equilibrium conditions:
Here we have summed the external y-forces. We can't solve this equation yet, as
there are two unknowns (TA and TE) and only one equation so far. We obtain our
second equation from the 2nd condition of equilibrium - sum of torque must equal
zero.
Before we can sum torque we must first PICK A POINT, as we always calculate
torque with respect to a point (or axis). Any point on (or off) the structure will
work, however some points result in an easier equation(s) to solve. As an
example, if we sum torque with respect to point E, we notice that unknown force
TE acts through point E, and, if a force acts through a point, that force does not
produce a torque with respect to the point (since the perpendicular distance is
zero). Thus summing torque about point E will result in an equation with only one
unknown, as shown
or -TA(12) +300 lb(6ft) + 160 lb(3 ft) + 140 lb(1 ft) = 0
Where we determined each term by looking at the forces acting on the beam one
by one, and calculating the torque produced by each force with respect to the
chosen point E from: Torque = Force x perpendicular distance (from the point
E to the line of action of the force). For a review of torque, select Torque.
The sign of the torque is determined by considering which way the torque would
cause the beam to rotate, if the beam were actually pinned at the chosen point.
That is, if we look at the 160 lb. weight of painter one (and ignore the other
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/StatI/state13a.htm (2 of 3)6/28/2005 1:49:42 PM
forces), the 160 lb. weight would cause the beam to start rotating
counterclockwise (+), if the beam were pinned at point E.
Torque example 2
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/StatI/state13b.htm6/28/2005 1:49:48 PM
Torque example 3
For the first part of this problem we sum the forces in both the x and y direction to
determine the resultant components our final force vector will have.
Sum Fx = +500 lb. - 100 lb. = 400 lb. =Rx
Sum Fy = -400 lb. + 250 lb. = -150 lb. =Ry
We next find the resultant vector from it's components: R = square root (Rx2
+Ry2) = Sqrt (4002 + (-150)2)
R = 427 lb., and then direction from Tan = Ry/Rx = -150/400 = -.375 The
negative y-component and the positive x-component tell us that the resultant
must be in the fourth quadrant. Solving for we find = -20.6 or 339.4 degrees.
Torque example 3
To determine where the resultant intersects the bottom of the body with respect
to point O, we realize that our resultant vector must produce the same torque with
respect to point O as the orginal forces produce. Thus we must determine the
Torque = + 100 lb. x 4" -400 lb. x 5" + 250 lb. x 17" - 500 lb. * 12" = -3350 in-
Our resultant must produce the same torque when it is applied or acts at the
bottom of the body. This actually simplifies the solution. At the bottom, the x-
component of our vector (400 lb.) produces no torque as its line of action passes
Return to:
Topic 1.3 Rotational Equilibrium
or select:
Topic 1: Statics I - Principles Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
Torque probs1
a) Calculate the moment of each force about point O that lies in the line of
the direction of rotation. (F1: 104 ft-lb., F2: -113 ft-lb.,F3: -40 ft-lb., F4 =
and angle of inclination with respect to the X axis). Compute the moment
of the resultant with respect to point O and compare with the results of
previous problem.
Torque probs1
Torque probs1
Torque probs1
Select:
Topic 1: Statics I - Principles Table of contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
3. A 12 foot long uniform steel beam weighs 500 pounds and has no
additional loads. (For static equilibrium calculations the entire weight of a
uniform beam can be considered to act at its midpoint.) The beam is
simply supported at its two ends. Determine the forces acting at each
end. (250 lb., 250 lb.)
4. A 20 foot long uniform steel beam weighs 800 pounds. The beam is
simply supported 4 feet from the ends. A load of 1200 pounds is at one
end of the beam and 1800 pounds at the other end. Determine the
support forces acting on the beam.(1400 lb., 2400 lb.)
5. An 8 foot beam (weightless) is simply supported at its left end and its
midpoint. There is a load of 150 pounds placed at the free end and a load
of 600 pounds placed midway between the supports. Determine the
support forces acting on the beam.(600 lb., 150 lb.)
6. A diving board is 16 feet long and is supported at its left end and a
point 4 feet from the left end. A 140 lb. diver stands at the right end of
the board. Determine the support forces acting on the diving board. (560
lb., - 420 lb.)
Statics-Review/Procedure/Problems
A simply supported 40 foot, 4000 lb bridge, shown above, has a 5 ton truck
parked 10 feet from the left end of the bridge. We would like to determine the
compressional force in each support. The weight of the bridge may be considered
to act at its center.
1. Free body diagram is shown above.
2. All forces are in x or y direction
3. Eq. Cond: Fx = 0 (no external x forces acting on structure.)
Fy = + Fa + Fb - 10,000 lb - 4,000 lb = 0
a = -10,000 lb x 10 ft - 4,000 lb x 20 ft + Fb x 40 ft = 0
Solving: Fa = 9500 lb, Fb = 4500 lb
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/StatI/stprb1rv.htm (1 of 3)6/28/2005 1:50:22 PM
Statics-Review/Procedure/Problems
Statics-Review/Procedure/Problems
Probem #2. Rework problem #1. Assume that the plank weighs 100 pounds and
that this weight may be considered to act at the center of the span.(260 lb., 200
lb.)
Problem #3. A 160 lb person is standing at the end of a diving board as shown
below. The diving board weighs 140 lbs, and this weight may be considered to act
at the center of the board. Calculate the vertical forces acting at each support, A &
B. (Include the directions of the forces) (-390 lb., 690 lb.)
Problem #4. A 500 pound sign is supported by a beam and cable as shown
below. The beam is attached to a wall by a hinge, and has a uniformly distributed
weight of 100 lbs. Determine the tension in the cable and the forces acting at the
hinge. (BC=917 lb., Ax = 733 lb., Ay = 50lb.)
Statics-Review/Procedure/Problems
Statics-Review/Procedure/Problems
Statics-Review/Procedure/Problems
Statics-Review/Procedure/Problems
123.4 lb (x ft) 162.3 lb * (3 ft) = -953 ft-lb, so x = - 3.78 ft (to left of center
of bottom)
3. The beam shown below is supported by a roller at point B and by a pinned joint at point E.
Determine the support forces at points B and E
Statics-Review/Procedure/Problems
Statics 1 - Examination-1
1. Three vectors (A, B, & C) are shown in the diagram below. Find one vector
(magnitude and direction) that will have the same effect as the three vectors
shown below. (Remember to show your work.) (71.7 lb. @ 140o)
2. Determine the tensions (T1, T2, T3) in each cable. (T1 = 500 lb., T2 = 71 lb.,
T3 = 505 lb.)
Statics 1 - Examination-1
3. A square block has four forces acting on it as shown in the diagram. Each force
a) Determine the resultant torque due to all the forces with respect to Point O. (+
407.2 ft-lb)
base) which would be equivalent to the four forces shown below. (142 lb @ 132
4. Determine the support forces acting on the beam at points A & D. (Ax = -707
lb., Ay = 995 lb., Dy = 1712 lb.)
Statics 1 - Examination-1
Select:
Topic 1: Statics I - Topic Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
(Required)
(Supplemental - may attempt)
(Supplemental - more difficult)
problems]
EXAMPLES: To show the application of the concepts discussed above and of our
general statics problem-solving technique, we will now look in careful detail at
several statics problems.
In Example 1 we will concentrate on finding the values of the external support
forces acting on the structure. Select Example 1
In Example 2, we will examine a relatively straight forward problem which points
out several features concerning torques and beam loading. Select Example 2
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/StatII/stat21.htm (4 of 5)6/28/2005 1:51:11 PM
In Example 3, we will see how both the external support reactions and also
the internal forces in a member of the structure may be found. Select Example
3
In Example 4, we will look at a problem which seems to be a statically
indeterminate problem. Select Example 4
Additional Examples: The following additional examples all demonstrate
different aspects and features of a variety of non-truss, or frame problems.
Return to:
Topic 2: Statics II - Topic Table of Contents
or Select:
Topic 2.2 - Trusses
Strength of Materials Home Page
In our example, the load forces are already shown by the downward arrows. We
next look at the forces exerted on the structure by the supports. Since each
support is a pinned joint, the worst case we could have is an unknown x and yforce acting on the structure at each support point. We also must choose directions
for the x and y support forces. In some problems the directions of the support
forces are clear from the nature of the problem. In other problems the directions
the support forces act is not clear at all. However, this is not really a problem. We
simple make our best guess for the directions of the support reactions. If our guess
is wrong, when we solve for the value of the support forces, that value will be
negative. This is important. A negative value when solving for a force does
not mean the force necessarily acts in the negative direction, rather it
means that the force acts in the direction OPPOSITE to the one we initially
chose.
Thus, in our first FBD on the right (Diagram 2), we have shown unknown x and y
support forces acting on the structure at each support point.
This is an accurate FBD, but it is not the best. The difficulty is that for our problem,
we have three equilibrium conditions (
), but we
have four unknowns (Ax, Ay, Dx, Dy) in this FBD. And as we are well aware, we
can not solve for more unknowns than we have independent equations.
We can draw a better FBD by reflecting on the concept of axial and non-axial
members. Notice in our structure that member ABC is a non-axial member (since
forces act on it at more than two points), while member CD is an axial member
(since if we drew a FBD of member CD we would see forces act on it at only two
points, D and C). This is important. Since CD is an axial member the force acting on
it from the wall (and in it) must act along the direction of the member. This means
that at point D, rather than having two unknown forces, we can draw one unknown
force acting at a known angle (force D acting at angle of 37o, as shown in Diagram
3). This means we have only three unknowns, Ax, Ay, and D. In Diagram 3, we
have also completed Step II, breaking any forces not in the x or y-direction into x
and y-components. Thus, in Diagram 3, we have shown the two components of D
(which act at 37o), D cos 37o being the x-component, and D sin 37o being the ycomponent. [Please notice that there are not three forces at point D, there is
either D acting at 37o or its two equivalent components, D cos 37o and D sin 37o.
In Diagram 3 at this point we really should cross out the D force, which has been
replaced by its components.]
Now before we proceed with the final step and determine the values of the
support reactions, we should deal with several conceptual questions which often
arise at this point. First, why can't we do at point A what we did at point D, that
is put in one force acting at a known angle. Member ABC is a horizontal member,
doesn't the wall just push horizontally on member ABC, can't we just drop the Ay
force? The answer is NO, because member ABC is not an axial member, it is not
simply in compression or tension, and the wall does not just push horizontally on
member ABC (as we will see in our solution). Thus the best we can do at point A
is unknown forces Ax and Ay.
A second question is often, what about the wall, aren't there forces acting on the
wall that we should consider? Well, yes and no. YES, there are forces acting on
the wall (as a matter of fact they are exactly equal and opposite to the forces
acting on the members, in compliance with Newton's Third Law). But NO we
should not consider them, because we are making a FBD of the STRUCTURE, not
of the wall, so we want to consider forces which act on the structure due to the
wall, not forces on the wall due to the structure.
Here we sum the x-forces, keeping track of their direction signs, forces to right, +,
to left, http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/StatII/stat21e1.htm (4 of 6)6/28/2005 1:51:51 PM
Sum of y-forces, including load forces. Again keeping track of direction signs.
Sum of Torque about a point. We choose point A. Point D is also a good point to
sum torque about since unknowns act through both points A and D, and if a force
acts through a point, it does not produce a torque with respect to that point. Thus
our torque equation will have less unknowns in it, and will be easier to solve. Notice
that with respect to point A, forces Ax, Ay, and D sin 37o do not produce torque
since their lines of action pass through point A. Thus in this problem the torque
equation has only one unknown, D. We can solve for force D, and then use it in the
two force equations to find the other unknowns, Ax and Ay. (Completing the
calculations, we arrive at the following answers.) D = +7500 lb. Ax = +6000 lb.
Ay = +1500 lb.
Note that all the support forces we solved for are positive, which means the
directions we choose for them initially are the actual directions they act. We have
now solved our problem. The support force at point D is 7500 lb. acting at 37o. The
support forces at A can be left as the two components, Ax = 6000 lb. and Ay =
1500 lb., or may be added (as vectors) obtaining one force at a known angle, as
shown in Diagram 4.
Thus the force at point A is 6185 lb. acting at 14o, as shown. This information
would help us purchase the correct size hinge (able to support 6185 lb. at A, and
able to support 7500 lb. at D), or estimate if the wall is strong enough to support
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/StatII/stat21e1.htm (5 of 6)6/28/2005 1:51:51 PM
) and
side due to the pull of the person. Point B must support both the load and
the pull of the person which results in a total force of 400 lb. acting on
point B)
In the FBD (Diagram 2), at point A we have shown one unknown support force 'A'
acting at a known angle (37o). We can do this at point A since we know member
AB is an axial member. In an axial member the force is along the direction of the
member, thus the floor must exert a force on the member also along the direction
of the member (due to equal and opposite forces principle). However, at point D,
since member D is a non-axial member, the best we can do is to show an
unknown Dx and Dy support forces acting on the structure at point D
[We simply make our best guess for the directions of the support
reactions. If our guess is wrong, when we solve for the value of the
support forces, that value will be negative - indicating our original
direction was incorrect].
In Diagram 2, we have also included Step II: Resolve (break) any forces not
in the x or y-direction into x and y-components. Thus, we have shown the
two components of A (which act at 37o) - A cos 37o being the x-component, and A
sin 37o being the y-component. .
(Here we sum the x-forces, keeping track of their direction signs, forces to right,
+, to left, -)
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/StatII/stat21e2.htm (2 of 4)6/28/2005 1:51:58 PM
(Sum of y-forces, including load forces. Again keeping track of direction signs.)
Sum of Torque about a point. We chose Point D to calculate torque. Since two
unknown forces (Dx, Dy) are acting at Point D, and if a force acts through a point,
it does not produce a torque with respect to that point; thus our torque equation
will have fewer unknowns in it, and will be easier to solve. We now proceed
through the structure, looking a each force and calculating the torque due to that
force with respect to the chosen Point D, and entering it in our torque equation
(above) with the correct sign (+ for counterclockwise acting torque, - for clockwise
acting torque). In this example, we must be careful to use the correct distance in
the torque relationship - Torque = Force x Perpendicular Distance. (See Torque
Review if needed.)
Finally, solving for our unknowns we obtain: A = +343 lb. Dx = +274 lb. Dy =
+354 lb.
We observe that all the support forces we solved for are positive, which means the
directions we chose for them initially are the actual directions they act.
(Notice that means that A acts at 37o as shown, Dx act in the negative x-direction,
We have now solved our problem - finding the support reactions (forces) acting on
the structure. We could add (as vectors) Dx & Dy to find one resultant force acting
) and
We note that the structure is composed of members ABC, CD, AD, and cable DE.
These members are pinned together at several points as shown in Diagram 1. A
load of 12,000 lb. is acting on member ABC at point B, and a load of 8000 lb. is
applied at point C. These forces are already shown by the downward arrows. We
next look at the forces exerted on the structure by the supports. Since each
support is a pinned joint, the worst case we could have is an unknown x and yforce acting on the structure at each support point. We also must choose directions
for the x and y support forces. In some problems the directions of the support
forces are clear from the nature of the problem. In other problems the directions
the support forces act is not clear at all. However, this is not really a problem. We
simply make our best guess for the directions of the support reactions. If our guess
is wrong, when we solve for the value of the support forces, that value will be
negative. This is important. A negative value when solving for a force does
not mean the force necessarily acts in the negative direction, rather it
means that the force acts in the direction OPPOSITE to the one we initially
chose.
Step 1: Draw a Free Body Diagram of the entire structure. In the FBD
(Diagram 2), we have shown unknown x and y support forces acting on the
structure at point A, however, at point E we have shown one unknown force 'E'
acting at a known angle (37o).
We can do this at point E since we know that ED is a cable, and a cable is an axial
member which can only be in tension. Since the cable pulls axially on the wall, the
wall pulls equally and in the opposite direction on the structure., as shown in
Diagram 2.
In Diagram 2, we have also included Step II, Resolve any forces not in the x or
y-direction into x and y-components. Thus, we have shown the two
components of E (which act at 37o) - E cos 37o being the x-component, and E sin
37o being the y-component. We have also used given angles and dimensions to
calculate some distance, as shown, which may be needed when we apply the
equilibrium equations.
We also note that at point A we have two members pinned together to the wall,
axial member AD, and non-axial ABC. Because of these two members (as opposed
to a single axial member, such as at point E), the best we can do at point A is to
replace the hinged joint by an unknown Ax and Ay support forces acting on the
structure as shown in Diagram 2. However, we have a good FBD since we have only
three unknown forces, and we have three independent equations from our
equilibrium conditions.
Step III. Apply the Equilibrium conditions.
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/StatII/stat21e3.htm (3 of 7)6/28/2005 1:52:04 PM
(Here we sum the x-forces, keeping track of their direction signs, forces to right, +,
to left, -)
(Sum of y-forces, including load forces. Again keeping track of direction signs.)
Sum of Torque about a point. We choose point A. Point E is also a good point to
sum torque about since unknowns act through both points A and D, and if a force
acts through a point, it does not produce a torque with respect to that point - thus,
our torque equation will have less unknowns in it, and will be easier to solve. Notice
that with respect to point A, forces Ax, Ay, and E sin 37o do not produce torque
since their lines of action pass through point A. Thus, in this problem the torque
equation has only one unknown - E. We can solve for E, and then use it in the two
force equations to find the other unknowns, Ax and Ay. Doing the mathematics we
arrive at the following answers.) E = +10,800 lb. Ax = +8620 lb. Ay = +13500
lb.
We see that all the support forces we solved for are positive, which means the
directions we chose for them initially are the actual directions they act. We have
now solved part one of our problem. The support force at point E is 10,800 lb.
acting at 37o. The support force(s) at A can be left as the two components, Ax =
8,620 lb. and Ay = 13,500 lb., or may be added (as vectors) obtaining one force
at a known angle.
The second part of the problem is to determine the force in axial member CD. (We
know member CD is axial as there are only two points at which forces acts on CD,
point C and point D.) To determine the force in an internal member of a structure
we use a procedure similar to that used to find the external support reactions. That
is, we draw a FBD, not of the entire structure, but of a member of the
structure, (choosing not the member we wish to find the force in, but a member it
acts on). Thus, if we wish to find the force in member CD, we draw a FBD - not of
member CD, but a member CD acts on, such as member ABC, or member AD. In
this example we will use member ABC to find the force in member CD.
To find the force in a member of the structure we will use the following
steps:
First, determine the external support reactions acting on the structure (as we did in
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/StatII/stat21e3.htm (4 of 7)6/28/2005 1:52:04 PM
the first part of this example). Then continue with steps below
I. Draw a Free Body Diagram of a member of the structure showing and
labeling all external load forces and support forces acting on that member,
include any needed dimensions and angles. (The member selected should be
one acted on by the member in which we wish to find the force.)
II. Resolve (break) all forces into their x and y-components.
III. Apply the Equilibrium Equations (
) and
solve for the unknown forces.
Step 1: FBD of Member ABC. There are actually two good FBD for member ABC. In
Diagram 3 we have shown the first of these. Notice at the left end we have shown
both the wall support reactions at A, and also the force from axial member AD
which acts on member ABC. At point C we have shown the force from axial member
CD which acts on member ABC. That is, we have isolated member ABD and
indicated the forces on it due to the other members (and the wall) attached to it.
The second good FBD of member ABC is shown in Diagram 4. What we have done
in this diagram is to look more closely at the left end of member ABC and observe
that the effect of the wall forces and the effect of member AD, is to give some net x
and y-force acting on member ABC. Thus, rather than show both the wall forces
and the force due to AD on ABC, we simple show an ACx and an ACy force which is
the net horizontal and vertical force acting on ABC at the left end. This is fine to do,
as we are looking for force CD, and that is still present in our FBD. This second FBD
is slightly easier than the first in that it will result in one less force (AD) in the
equilibrium equations. We will use the second FBD in the rest of the problem.
Step 2: Resolve forces into their x and y-components (This is done in Diagram 5.)
Notice we have chosen directions earlier for the forces. These may not be the
correct directions, but our solution will tell us if we have the right or wrong
directions for the unknown forces.
Step 3: Apply the equilibrium conditions and solve for unknown forces.
Sum Fx: ACx + CD cos 53.8o = 0
Sum Fy: ACy -12,000 lb. + CD sin 53.8o = 0
Sum TA: -12,000 lb. (4 ft) + CD sin 53.8o (8 ft ) =0
Solving: CD = 7,440 lb., ACx = - 4390 lb. (- sign shows force acts opposite
direction chosen), ACy = 6000 lb.
We have determined the force in CD to be 7,440 lb. Since the force is positive, this
indicates that we have chosen the correct direction for the force CD (which
indicates it is in tension). This solves our problem. (For a little further analysis of
forces at point A, select MORE.)
Return to Topic 2.1 - Frames
Continue to Example 4
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/StatII/stat21e3.htm (6 of 7)6/28/2005 1:52:04 PM
or select:
Topic 2: Statics II - Topic Table of Contents
Point A: As an aside, notice that the forces ACx and ACy (The horizontal and vertical
forces acting on member ABC at end A.) are not the same as the forces Ax and Ay
acting on the entire structure at joint A. This results since the forces of the wall at
point A are not just acting on member ABC, but are distributed to both members
ABC and AD, as shown in Diagram 6. Note in the diagram that if the forces ACx and
ADx are summed (13010 lb. - 4390 lb. = 8620 lb.), and if forces ACy and ADy are
summed (6000 lb. + 7500 lb. = 13500 lb.), that their vector sums equal the
external forces (Ax and Ay) acting on point A, as we expect they should.
This is important. A negative value when solving for a force does not
mean the force necessarily acts in the negative direction, rather it means
that the force acts in the direction OPPOSITE to the one we initially chose.
Step 1: Free Body Diagram (FBD).
In the FBD (Diagram 2), we have shown unknown x and y support forces acting
on the structure at pinned support points A and D, (Ax, Ay, Dx, Dy). If we think
ahead somewhat, we realize that there could be a problem. We have four
unknown forces supporting the structure, but there are only three equations in our
Equilibrium Conditions,
Normally, one can not solve for more unknowns then there are independent
equations. Our first reaction should be to see if we can draw a better FBD.
Perhaps we can replace the two unknowns at either point A or D by one
unknown acting at a known angle (which is possible if we have a single axial
member acting at the support point). However in this case both member ABC
and member DEF are non-axial members, and the forces in them (and on them
from the wall) do not act along the axis of the member. Thus, we already have
the best FBD possible - we can not reduce the number of external unknowns
acting on the structure.
At this point we will simply continue with our normal analysis procedure and see
what results.
Step II: Resolve any forces not in the x or y-direction into x and ycomponents. (All forces are already in either the x or y-direction.
Step III. Apply the Equilibrium conditions.
point. We choose point D. Forces Ay, Dx and Dy do not produce torque since their
lines of action pass through point A. Thus, the torque equation has only one
unknown, Ax. We solve for Ax, and then use it in the sum of forces in the xdirection equation to find the unknown, Dx . And if we do so, we find: Ax =
+18000 lb. Dx = +18000 lb. (The positive signs indicate we initially chose the
correct direction for the forces.) However, please notice that while we found Ax
and Dx, we can not find Ay and Dy. There are still two unknowns in the yequation and not enough information to determine then at this point. Thus,
analysis of the structure as a whole has enabled us to determine several of the
external support forces, but not all of them. What now?
First, an overview. There are problems for which the static equilibrium conditions
are not enough to enable one to solve the problem. They are called Statically
Indeterminate Problems, and we will be considering these a bit later. Then
there are problems which, on first glance, appear to be statically indeterminate,
but are not. That is the case here. To find the remaining unknown support forces
(and at the same time, determining the force in member CF), we will now take out
a member of the structure and apply our statics analysis procedure to the selected
member of the structure (rather than the entire structure). We will select member
ABC to analyze. (See Diagram 3)
Step 1: Free Body Diagram (FBD)
In Diagram 3, we have drawn a FBD of member ABC, showing and labeling all
forces external to member ABC which act on it. That is at point A we have the
forces of the wall acting on ABC, at point B we have an axial force on ABC due to
member BE, and at point C we have a axial force on ABC due to the member CF.
Both member BE and CF are axial members and so we know the directions their
forces act - along their axis. We do have to guess if they push or pull on member
ABC, and we have chosen those directions as shown, (if the direction chosen is
wrong, the force's value will be negative when we solve). We also are happy with
the FBD as it has only three unknowns acting on the member, which indicates that
we should be able to solve completely for the unknowns.
We now solve the first equation for CF, then use that value in the last equation to
find BE, and use both values in the middle equation to find Ay, giving us: CF =
30,000 lb., BE = 36,000 lb., Ay = -12, 000 lb. Please note that the value of Ay
is negative, which indicates the direction we chose was incorrect. Ay acts
downward rather than in the positive y-direction we initial chose. Additionally, we
now can return to the equations for the entire structure (see below), and knowing
the value for Ay, we can use it in the y-forces equation to solve for the value of
Dy.
Once again, the negative sign indicates we selected the wrong direction for Dy,
rather than acting downward it actually acts upward. See Diagram 5 for final force
values and directions.
Ax = 18000 lb.
Ay = 12,000 lb. Dx = 18000 lb. Dy = 21,000 lb. CF = 30,000 lb. BE =
36,000 lb.
Return to: Topic 2.1 - Frames
or select:
Topic 2: Statics II - Topic Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
solution111
Unless otherwise indicated, all joints and support points are assumed to be
pinned or hinged joints.
Solution:
PARTS A & B:
solution111
STEP 1: Draw
a free body
diagram
showing and
labeling all load
forces and
support
(reaction)
forces, as well
as any needed
angles and
dimensions.
STEP 2: Break any
forces not already
in x and y direction
into their x and y
components.
STEP 3: Apply the
equilibrium
conditions.
Sum Fx = -E cos
(37o) + Ax = 0
Sum Fy = Ay + E sin (37o) - 10,000 lbs - 8,000 lbs = 0
Sum TA = E cos (37o)(12ft) - (10,000 lbs)(4 ft) - (8,000 lbs)(12ft) = 0
Solving for the unknowns: E = 14,200 lbs; Ay = 9,480 lbs; Ax = 11,400 lbs
solution111
solution112
Solution:
PARTS A & B
STEP 1: Draw a free body diagram showing and labeling all load forces and
solution112
9,710 lbs
PART C - Now find internal force in member DC.
In this problem member DC is a single axial member connected to the wall at
point D. Therefore, the force in member DC is equal and opposite the force
exerted on DC by the wall. From parts A and B, the force on DC due to the wall is
13,800 lbs. Therefore, force in DC is also 13,800 lbs (in tension since DC is a
cable).
solution113
Unless otherwise indicated, all joints and support points are assumed to be
Solution:
PARTS A & B
STEP 1: Draw a free body diagram showing and labeling all load forces and
solution113
solution113
solution114
Unless otherwise indicated, all joints and support points are assumed to be
pinned or hinged joints.
Solution:
PARTS A & B:
STEP 1: Draw a free body diagram showing and labeling all load forces and
solution114
support
(reaction)
forces, as well
as any needed
angles and
dimensions.
STEP 2: Break
any forces not
already in x
and y direction
into their x and
y components.
STEP 3: Apply
the equilibrium
conditions.
Sum Fx = -E cos
(37o) + Ax = 0
Sum Fy = E sin
(37o) + Ay
12,000 lbs - 8,000 lbs = 0
STEP 1: Draw a free body diagram of a member that DC acts on - member ABC.
solution114
solution115
Unless otherwise indicated, all joints and support points are assumed to be
pinned or hinged joints.
Solution:
PARTS A & B:
STEP 1: Draw a free body diagram showing and labeling all load forces and
solution115
and dimensions.
components.
equilibrium conditions.
Sum Fx = -A cos(56.3o) + Bx
= 0
Sum Fy = - A sin(56.3o) +
By - 12,000 lbs = 0
Sum TA = By(16 ft) (12,000 lbs)(24 ft) = 0
Solving for the unknowns:
A = 7210 lbs; By = 18,000 lbs; Bx = 4,000 lbs
STEP 1: Draw a free body diagram of a member that CD acts on - member BCE.
solution115
(see diagram).
solution116
Unless otherwise indicated, all joints and support points are assumed to be
pinned or hinged joints.
Solution:
PARTS A & B:
STEP 1: Draw a free body diagram showing and labeling all load forces and
solution116
support
(reaction)
forces, as
well as any
needed
angles and
dimensions.
STEP 2:
Break any
forces not
already in x
and y
direction into
their x and y
components.
STEP 3:
Apply the
equilibrium
conditions.
Sum Fx = Ax
=0
Sum Fy = Ay + Ey - 8,000 lbs - 4,000 lbs = 0
Sum TA = (-8,000 lbs)(3 ft) - (4,000 lbs)(6.5 ft) + Ey(8.5 ft) = 0
Solving for the unknowns:
Ey = 5,880 lbs; Ay = 6,120 lbs
STEP 1: Draw a free body diagram of a member that CD acts on - member BDE.
solution116
3. The structure shown is composed of solid rigid members ABC, CD, and BDE
pinned together at points B, C, and D. The structure is supported by a roller at
point E, and pinned to the wall at point A.For the structure shown, determine the
values of the external support reactions, and the force in member DC.
(Ax = 8,670 lb., Ay = 10,000 lb.,
Ex =- 8,670 lb., DC = 15,600 (T))
4. The structure shown is composed of solid rigid members ABC, CD, BD, and DE
pinned together at points B, C, and D. The structure is pinned to the floor at
points A and E. For the structure shown, determine the values of the external
support reactions, and the force in member CD.
(Ax = 6375 lb., Ay = 10500 lb., E = 10,625 lb.
CD = 9000 lb. C)
frame problems 2
1. Determine the reaction at supports A and B of the beam in the diagram shown.
Neglect the weight of the beam. (Ax = 938 lb., Ay = 728 lb., B = 814 lb.)
frame problems 2
3. A brace is hinged at one end to a vertical wall and at the other end to a beam 14ft
long. The beam weighs 250 lb. and is also hinged to a vertical wall as shown. The
beam carries load of 500 lb. at the free end. What will be the compressive force in the
brace, and what will be the values of the vertical and horizontal components of the
reaction at hinge A? (Ax = 596 lb., Ay = 45 lb., B = 994 lb.)
frame problems 2
4. A gate has a weight of 200 lb., which may be considered as uniformly distributed,
see the diagram shown. A small boy weighing 95 lb. climbs up on the gate at the point
B. What will be the reactions on the hinges? (Upper hinge horizontal force only = 318
lb., lower hinge horizontal force = 318 lb., vertical force = 295 lb.)
frame problems 2
5. In an irrigation project, it was found necessary to cross low ground or else swing the
canal to the left by cutting into the solid rock. It was decided to run the canal as a
flume and support it on a number of frames as shown in the diagram. The two
members rest in sockets in solid rock at points A and B. These sockets may be
considered as hinges. What will be the vertical and horizontal components of the
reactions at A and B? The weight of the water in the flume supported by each frame is
estimated as 18,200 lb. (This is a somewhat more complicated problem then the
others in this problem set, and it may be skipped. Or contact your instructor for
hints.) (Ax = 6389 lb., Ay = 5093 lb., Bx = 6389 lb., By = 13, 107 lb.)
frame problems 2
6. An Ocean liner has an arrangement for supporting lifeboats and for lowering them
over the side as shown in the diagram. There is a socket at A and a smooth hole
through the deck rail at B. If the boat and its load weigh 2,000 lb., what are the
reactions at A and B? Two identical davits support each lifeboat. (Ay = 1000 lb., Ax =
1250 lb., Bx = 1250 lb.)
frame problems 2
Answers: 1) Ax = 938 lb., Ay = 728 lb., B = 814 lb.; 2) Ax = 404 lb., Ay = 296 lb., C
= 572 lb.; 3) Ax = 596 lb., Ay = 45 lb., B = 994 lb.; 4) Upper hinge horizontal force
only = 318 lb., lower hinge horizontal force = 318 lb., vertical force = 295 lb.; 5) Ax =
6389 lb., Ay = 5093 lb., Bx = 6389 lb., By = 13, 107 lb.; 6) Ay = 1000 lb., Ax = 1250
lb., Bx = 1250 lb.
Return to Topic 2.1 - Frames
or select:
Topic 2: Statics II -Topic Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
frame problems 3
frame problems 3
frame problems 3
4. Sketch the structure and draw a free body diagram for the relevant member or
the entire structure. Write the appropriate moment or force equations and solve
them for the unknown forces. (Ax=500 lb., Ay=250 lb., Bx=500 lb., By=750 lb.,
Dx=100 lb., Dy=750 lb., directions not indicated)
frame problems 3
5. Calculate the pin reactions at each point of the pins in the frame shown below.
(Ax=300 lb., Ay=150 lb., Bx=300 lb., By=150 lb., Cx=300 lb., Cy=0, Dx =0,
Dy=150 lb., Ey=150 lb., directions not indicated)
frame problems 3
6. The tongs shown are used to grip an object. For an input force of 15 lb. on
each handle, determine the forces exerted on the object and the forces exerted on
the pin at A. (F = 48 lb. on object from each jaw., Ax = 0, Ay=63 lb.)
frame problems 3
or select:
Topic 2: Statics II -Topic Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
The procedure for determining the external support reactions acting on a truss is
exactly the same as the procedure for determining the support forces in non-truss
problems, however the method for determining the internal forces in members of
a truss is not the same. The procedures for finding internal forces in truss
members are Method of Sections and Method of Joints (either of which may
be used), and in fact, one must be very careful not to use these methods with nontruss problems as they will not give correct results. Perhaps the best way to clarify
these concepts is to work very slowly and carefully through a truss example.
Example 1: In Diagram 1 we have a truss supported by a pinned joint at Point A
and supported by a roller at point D. A vertical load of 500 lb. acts at point F, and
a horizontal load of 800 lb. acts at Point C. For this structure we wish to determine
the values of the support reactions, and the force (tension/compression) in
members BE, BC, and EF.
For the first part, determining the external support reactions, we apply the normal
static equilibrium procedure:
I. Draw a Free Body Diagram of the entire structure showing and labeling
all external load forces and support forces, include any needed
dimensions and angles. Note that at the pinned support point A, the best we
can do is to put both an unknown x and y support force, however at point D we
only need a unknown y support force since a roller can only be in compression and
so must support vertically in this problem.
II. Resolve (break) all forces into their x and y-components.
III. Apply the Equilibrium Equations (
and solve for the unknown forces.
(Sum of x-forces)
(Sum of y-forces)
(Sum of Torque about A.)
Solving we obtain: Ax = 800 lb, Ay = -33 lb, Dy = 533 lb (The negative sign for
force Ay means that we initially chose it in the incorrect direction, Ay acts
downward, not upward as shown in FBD.)
Part 2
Once we have determined the values of the external support reactions, we may
proceed to determining the values of the forces in the members themselves, the
internal forces. In this first example, we will use Method of Joints to determine
the force in the selected members. In Method of Joints, rather then analyze the
entire structure, or even a member of the structure, we rather examine the joint
(pin or hinge) where members come together. As the structure is in static
equilibrium, so the pin or joint will be in static equilibrium, and we may apply the
static equilibrium conditions (and procedure) to solve for the forces on the joint(s)
due to the members, which will also equal the forces in the axial members - due
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/StatII/stat22.htm (2 of 6)6/28/2005 1:53:57 PM
direction. We can see this if we consider the y-component of AB, which clearly
will be in the - y direction. However, the y-support reaction, 33 lb., is also in the
-y direction. There are no other y-forces on the joint, so it can not be in
equilibrium is both forces act in the same direction. We will leave AB as chosen
to see, if indeed, that the solution will tell us that AB is in the wrong direction.]
Remember, we are trying to find the forces in members BE, BC, and EF. Now
that we have the forces in members AE (756 lb. tension) and AB (55 lb.
tension), we can move unto a second joint (joint B) and find two of the
unknowns we are looking for. We could not have solved for the forces acting at
joint B initially, since there were three unknowns (initially) at joint B (AB, BC,
and BE). However now that we have analyzed joint A, we have the value of the
force in member AB, and can proceed to joint B where we will now have only
two unknowns to determine (BE & BC).
(Sum of x-forces)
(Sum of y-forces)
Solving : BC = 44 lb. (Tension) BE = 33 lb. (Compression)
Finally, we can now proceed to analyze joint E and determine the force in member
EF.
Joint E: Procedure - Method of Joints
Step 1. FBD of the Joint E, showing and labeling all forces acting on the
In Diagram 6, we have on the left, the FBD of joint E with all external forces
acting on the joint shown, and our initial direction for the forces. If the directions
we chose for the unknowns are correct, their values will be positive in the solution.
If a value is negative it means the force acts in the opposite direction. The right
hand drawing in Diagram 6 is the FBD of joint E with all forces resolved into x and
y-components. We now apply the Equilibrium Conditions (for joints).
(Sum of x-forces)
(Sum of y-forces)
Solving : EC = 55 lb. (Tension) EF = 712 lb. (Tension) Since both force values
came out positive in our solution, this means that the initial directions selected for
the forces were correct.
We have now solved our problem, finding both the external forces and forces in
members BE, BC, and EF (and along the way, the forces in several other members
- See Diagram 7 )
Additional Examples
To see an example of finding internal forces in a truss using Method of Sections,
select Example 1
For additional Examples of Truss using Method of Joints, select Example 2
For additional Examples of Truss using Method of Sections, select Example 3
Select:
Topic 2: Statics II - Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
In Method of Sections, we will 'cut' the truss into two sections by drawing a line
through the truss. This line may be vertical, horizontal, at some angle, or even
curved depending on the problem. The criteria for this line is that we would like to
cut through the unknown members (whose internal force value we wish to
determine), but not to cut through more than three unknowns (since we will have
three equilibrium conditions equations, we can only solve for three unknowns). In
this example, cutting the truss once will enable us to find our selected unknowns,
however, in some trusses, or for finding more internal forces, one may have to
repeat Method of Sections several times to determine all the unknowns.
In Diagram 2, we have cut through the original truss with a vertical line just to the
right of member BE. This vertical line cuts through members BC, EC, and EF (the
selected members whose internal forces we wish to determine). We have shown
the section of the truss to the left of the cut. We now treat this section of the truss
as if it were a completely new structure. The internal forces in members BC, EC,
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/StatII/stat22e1.htm (1 of 3)6/28/2005 1:54:05 PM
and EF now become external forces with respect to this section. We have
represented these forces with the arrows shown. The forces must act along the
direction of the cut member (since all members in a truss are axial members), and
we have selected an initial direction either into or away from the section for each
of the forces. If we have selected an incorrect initial direction for a force, when we
solve for the value of the force, the value will be negative indicating the force acts
in the opposite direction of the one chosen initially. We may now proceed with the
analysis of this structure using standard Static's techniques.
For the first part of the problem we proceed using our normal static's procedure.
STEP 1: Draw a free body diagram showing and labeling all load forces
and support (reaction) forces as well as any needed angles and
dimensions. (Note in Diagram 2, we have replaced the pinned support by an
unknown x and y force (Ax , Ay), and replaced the roller support by the vertical
unknown force Dy.
STEP 2: Break any forces not already in x and y direction into their x and y
components.
STEP 3: Apply the equilibrium conditions
: Ax = 0
Solving for the unknowns: ED = 13,100 lbs (C); CD = 5,240 lbs (T)
Now that we have calculated the values for ED and CD we can move to joint E. We
could not solve joint E initially as it had too many unknowns forces acting on it.
JOINT E:
STEP 1: Draw a free body diagram of the joint, showing and labeling all
external forces and loads, and including any needed angles. (Diagram 4)
We select an initial direction for the unknowns, if their solution value is negative
they act in a direction opposite to the direction initially selected.
STEP 2: Resolve all forces into x and y components. (Diagram 4).
Solving for the unknowns: FE = 10,500 lbs (C); CE = 13,100 lbs (T) (Since
force values were positive, the initial direction chosen for the forces was correct.)
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/StatII/stat22e2.htm (3 of 4)6/28/2005 1:54:11 PM
Now that we have calculated the values for FE and CE we move to joint C. We
could not solve joint C initially as it had too many unknowns forces acting on it.
JOINT C:
STEP 1: Draw a free body diagram of the joint, showing and labeling all
external forces and loads, and including any need angles. (Diagram 5) We
select an initial direction for the unknowns, if their solution value is negative they
act in a direction opposite to the direction initially selected.
STEP 2: Resolve all forces into x and y components. (Diagram 5).
Solving for the unknowns: FC = 13,100 lbs (c); BC = 15,950 lbs (t) Thus,
member FC is in compression with a force of 13, 100 lbs.
Return to Topic 2.2 - Trusses
or select:
Topic 2: Statics II - Applications-Topic Table of Contents
Statics & Strength of Materials - Course Table of Contents
+ Hy(80 ft) = 0
Solving for the unknowns: Ay = 21,500 lbs; Hy = 20,500 lbs. These are the
external support reactions acting on the structure.
Part 2: Now we will find internal force in member DG by method of sections. Cut
the truss vertically with a line passing through members DF, DG, and EG. We have
shown the section of the truss to the right of the cut. We now treat this section of
the truss as if it were a completely new structure. The internal forces in members
DF, DG, and EG now become external forces with respect to this section. We have
represented these forces with the arrows shown. The forces must act along the
direction of the cut member (since all members in a truss are axial members), and
we have selected an initial direction either into or away from the section for each
of the forces. If we have selected an incorrect initial direction for a force, when we
solve for the value of the force, the value will be negative indicating the force acts
in the opposite direction of the one chosen initially. We may now proceed with the
analysis of this structure using standard Static's techniques.
solution121
Solution:
PARTS A & B:
STEP 1: Draw a free body diagram showing and labeling all load forces and
solution121
diagram).
JOINT A:
solution121
solution122
Unless otherwise indicated, all joints and support points are assumed to be
pinned or hinged joints.
Solution:
PARTS A & B:
solution122
solution122
members
GE, GC and
BC, and is
just to the
right of point
G (see diagram). The
internal
forces in
members
GE, GC and
BC now
become
external
forces acting on the left hand section as shown. (We chose directions for these
forces which may or may not be correct, but which will become clear when we
solve for their values.)
STEP 2: Now treat the section shown as a new structure and apply statics
procedure
- Draw a free body diagram of the left hand section.
- Resolve all forces into x an y components (see diagram).
- Apply equilibrium conditions:
Sum Fx = - GE cos (37o) + GC cos (37o) + BC = 0
Sum Fy = 4,000 lbs - GE sin (37o) - GC sin (37o) = 0
Sum TG = (-4,000 lbs)(4 ft) + BC(3 ft) = 0
Solving for the unknowns:
BC = 5,330 lbs; GE = 6,670 lbs; GC = 0 lbs
solution123
Unless otherwise indicated, all joints and support points are assumed to be
pinned or hinged joints.
Solution:
PARTS A & B:
STEP 1: Draw a free body diagram showing and labeling all load forces and
solution123
support (reaction)
forces, as well as any
needed angles and
dimensions.
STEP 2: Break any
forces not already in
x and y direction into
their x and y
components.
STEP 3: Apply the
equilibrium
conditions.
Sum Fx = Dx = 0
Sum Fy = Ay + Dy 10,000 lbs - 12,000
lbs = 0
Sum TA = Dy(12 ft) (12,000 lbs)(8 ft) (10,000 lbs)(4 ft) = 0
Solving for the unknowns:
Dy = 11,300 lbs; Ay = 10,700 lbs
solution123
diagram).
conditions:
= 0
Solving for the unknowns: AG = 12,900 lbs (c); AB = 7,140 lbs (t)
JOINT B:
STEP 1: Draw a free body diagram of the joint.
diagram).
Sum Fx = -7,140lbs + BC = 0
Sum Fy = BG = 0
Solving for the unknowns: BG = 0 lbs ; BC = 7,140 lbs (t)
JOINT D:
STEP 1: Draw a free body
conditions:
(56.3o) = 0
Solving for the unknowns: CD = 7,560 lbs (t); ED = 13,600 lbs (c)
JOINT C:
solution123
conditions:
GC cos (56.3o) = 0
(56.3o) = 0
Solving for the unknowns: CE = 11,400 lbs (t); GC = 730 lbs (t)
solution124
Unless otherwise indicated, all joints and support points are assumed to be pinned
or hinged joints.
Solution:
PARTS A & B:
STEP 1: Draw a free body diagram showing and labeling all load forces and support
solution124
(reaction)
forces, as
well as any
needed
angles and
dimensions.
STEP 2:
Break any
forces not
already in
x and y
direction
into their x
and y
components.
STEP 3:
Apply the
equilibrium
conditions.
Sum Fx = Ax = 0
Sum Fy = Ay + Dy - 12,000 lbs - 20,000 lbs = 0
Sum TA = (-12,000 lbs)(4 ft) - (20,000 lbs)(12 ft) + Dy(24 ft) = 0
Solving for the unknowns: Dy = 12,000 lbs; Ay = 20,000 lbs
joint.
solution124
JOINT E:
STEP 1: Draw a free
body diagram of the
joint.
STEP 2: Resolve all
forces into x and y
components (see
diagram).
STEP 3: Apply equilibrium conditions:
Sum Fx = (-13,100 lbs) cos (66.4o) + CE cos (66.4o) = 0
Sum Fy = (13,100 lbs) sin (66.4o) - CE sin (66.4o) = 0
Solving for the unknowns: FE = 10,500 lbs (c); CE = 13,100 lbs (t)
JOINT C:
STEP 1: Draw a free body
diagram of the joint.
STEP 2: Resolve all forces
into x and y components
(see diagram).
STEP 3: Apply equilibrium
conditions:
Sum Fx = 5,450 + (13,100
lbs) cos (66.4o) + FC cos (66.4o) - BC = 0
Sum Fy = (13,100 lbs) sin (66.4o) - FC sin (66.4o) = 0
Solving for the unknowns: FC = 13,100 lbs (c); BC = 15,950 lbs (t)
solution125
Unless otherwise indicated, all joints and support points are assumed to be
pinned or hinged joints.
Solution:
PARTS A & B:
STEP 1: Draw a free body diagram showing and labeling all load forces and
solution125
solution125
STEP 2:
Resolve all
forces into x
and y
components
(see
diagram).
STEP 3:
Apply
equilibrium
conditions:
Sum Fx = FB
cos (51.3o) 8,000 lbs = 0
Sum Fy = BC
- 30,000 lbs + FB sin (51.3o) - GF + 40,000 lbs = 0
Sum TB = (-8,000 lbs)(5 ft) - GF(4 ft) + (40,000 lbs)(4 ft) = 0
Solving for the unknowns: FB = 12,8000 lbs (t); GF = 30,000 lbs (c); BC =
10,000 lbs (t)
solution126
Solution:
PARTS A & B:
STEP 1: Draw a free body diagram showing and labeling all load forces and support
solution126
PART C - Now find internal force in member CD by sections. Cut vertically through
members BD, CD, and CE near to points B and C. Analyze left section as shown in
diagram.
STEP 1: Draw a free body diagram of the left section, showing and labeling all
external
loads and
forces.
STEP 2:
Resolve all
forces into
x and y
components.
STEP 3:
Apply the
equilibrium
conditions:
Sum Fx =
BD cos
(14o) - CD
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Stests/statics/sol126.htm (2 of 3)6/28/2005 1:54:56 PM
solution126
cos (45o) - CE = 0
Sum Fy = -4,000 lbs + 3,360 lbs - BD sin (14o) - CD sin (45o) = 0
Sum TC = (-3,360 lbs)(12 ft) - BD cos (14o)(15 ft) = 0
Solving for the unknowns:
BD = -2,770 lbs (opposite direction), 2,770 lbs (c); CD = 43 lbs (c); CE =2,720 lbs
(t)
the joints. The stucture is pinned to the floor at point E and supported by a roller
at point F. Determine the external force support reactions and the force in
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/StatII/statp22t.htm (2 of 4)6/28/2005 1:55:04 PM
CD = 10,500 lb (C))
the joints. The stucture is pinned to the floor at point A and supported by a roller
at point L.Determine the external force support reactions and the force in
members DF, DG and EG by any method.
(Ay = 14,000 lb, Ly = 18,000 lb, DF = 30,600 (C), DG = 10, 420 (C), EG = 23,330 (T))
Select:
Topic 2: Statics II - Applications-Topic Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
Truss probs 2
2. Calculate the forces in all member of the truss shown in the following diagram
using the method of joints. [Ay = 6,540 lb., Ax = -10,000 lb, Cy = 8460 lb., AB =
8,375 lb, AC = 15,230 lb, BC=17,420 lb)
Truss probs 2
3. Calculate the forces in all members of the truss shown in the following diagram
using the method of joints. (Ay = 225 lb, Ax = -500 lb., Cy = 475 lb., AB = 450
lb., AD = 890 lb., BC = 950 lb.)
Truss probs 2
4. Calculate the forces in all members of the truss shown in the following diagram
using the method of joints. [Ay=Ey=40,000 lb., AB =56,580 lb. (C), AF = FG =
40,000 lb. (T), BF=0, BC = CD =65,000 lb (T), BG = 35,360 (T), CG = 50,000 lb,
right side same by symmetry]
5. Calculate the forces in all members of the trusses shown in the following
diagram using the method of joints. [Ey =90,000 lb., Fy=-20,000 lb., Fx=40,000
lb., AB = 0, AC = 35,000 lb. (C), BC = 21,220 lb. (C), BD=20,000 lb. (C), CD =
25,000 lb. (C), DF = 20,000 lb. (C), CE = 90,000 lb. (C), EF = 0, CF = 56,580 lb.
(T)]
Truss probs 2
6. Calculate the forces in members BC, BG, and FG, by method of joints, for the
cantilever truss shown below. [Ax=-26,250 lb., Ay=15,000 lb., Ex=26,250 lb., BC
= 8,750 lb. (T), BG=17,366 lb. (T), FG=17,500 lb (C)]
Truss probs 2
Select:
Topic 2: Statics II - Applications-Topic Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
Truss probs 3
Truss probs 3
Truss probs 3
Truss probs 3
7. For the Howe roof truss shown below, determine the support reactions and the forces in members
BC, CI, and IJ by the method of sections.
Select:
Topic 2: Statics II - Applications-Topic Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
Sample Examination
B. Determine the value of all the support forces acting on the structure.
C. Determine the force (tension or compression) in member CD.
Unless otherwise indicated, all joints and support points are assumed to be
pinned or hinged joints.
Sample Examination
2.) The structure shown below is a truss which is pinned to the floor at point A and
supported by a roller at point H. For this structure:
A. Draw a Free Body Diagram showing all support forces and loads.
B. Determine the value of all the support forces acting on the structure.
C. Determine the force in member DG by method of sections.
Unless otherwise indicated, all joints and support points are assumed to be
pinned or hinged joints.
We recognize right away that knowing the force in the cable BC is not enough to
tell us if the cable is safe or if it will break. Clearly it depends on several other
factors in addition to the force in the cable. It depends on the size of the cable. A
1" diameter steel cable will carry more load than a " diameter steel cable. It
also depends on what the cable is made of. A steel cable will clearly support more
than an aluminum cable. To address the first consideration, we will turn to the
concept of STRESS.
AXIAL STRESS
What is known as Axial (or Normal) Stress, often symbolized by the Greek
letter sigma, is defined as the force perpendicular to the cross sectional area of
the member divided by the cross sectional area. Or
shown. If we divide that axial force, F, by the cross sectional area of the rod (A),
this quotient would be the axial stress in the member. Axial stress is the
equivalent of pressure in a gas or liquid. As you remember, pressure is the force/
unit area. So axial stress is really the 'pressure' in a solid member. Now the
question becomes, how much 'pressure' can a material bear before it fails.
Well, we will examine that question in some detail in a bit, but to give an example,
a normal operating stress for carbon steel might be 30,000 lb/in2. Now let's
return to our example shown in Diagram 1 (repeated in Diagram 3). In our
structure , if we assume both the member and the cable are made of steel, and if
the diameter of the cable is .5 inches, and if the cross sectional area of the
member is 1.2 in2, are the stresses in the cable BC and in member AC within the
'allowable' stress for steel of 30,000 lb/in2?
For the cable BC: Axial Stress = F/A = 13,090 lb./ (p * .25"2) = 66,700 lb/
in2
For the member AC: Axial Stress = F/A = 14,180 lb./ (1.2 in2) = 11,820 lb/
in2
These are interesting results. We see from the calculations that the stress in
member AC (11,820 lb/in2) is well within the allowable stress of 30,000 lb/in2,
however, we also see clearly that the stress in the cable AC (66,700 lb/in2) is over
twice the allowable stress of 30,000 lb/in2. This means that the inch diameter
cable is much too small to support the load.
Well, what size cable should we use? Another interesting question whose
answer we find by simply reversing our process, using the stress equation to find
the minimum size cable for the allowable stress of 30,000 lb/in2. That is, we set
the stress value to the allowable stress of 30,000 lb/in2, put in the axial force in
the cable, and solve for the cable area needed.
Axial Stress = F/A : 30,000 lb/in2 = 13,090 lb./A; solving for A = .436 in2.
Since the area of cable = 3.14 (r2), we can solve for the radius r = square root
(.436 in2/3.14) = .373 inches. So the minimum diameter steel cable which
would safely support the load is d = .746 inches ( or inch diameter cable).
This is an important process. We checked the members in the structure, found one
was not safe according to the allowable stress for the material, and then
calculated the size member needed so that the structure would be safe.
Our next step is to examine an associated property of stress, strain, and to
examine the stress and strain in materials in somewhat more detail. Select Topic
3.2: Stress, Strain & Hooke's Law - II
or Select:
Topic 3: Stress, Strain & Hooke's Law - Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
In diagram 2, we see that, if our metal rod is tested by increasing the tension in
the rod, the deformation increases. In the first region the deformation increases in
proportion to the force. That is, if the amount of force is doubled, the amount of
deformation is doubled. This is a form of Hooke's Law and could be written this
way: F = k (deformation), where k is a constant depending on the material (and is
sometimes called the spring constant). After enough force has been applied the
material enters the elastic region - where the force and the deformation are not
proportional, but rather a small amount of increase in force produces a large
amount of deformation. In this region, the rod often begins to 'neck down', that is,
the diameter becomes smaller as the rod is about to fail. Finally the rod actually
breaks.
The point at which the Elastic Region ends is called the elastic limit, or the
proportional limit. In actuality, these two points are not quite the same. The
Elastic Limit is the point at which permanent deformation occurs, that is, after
the elastic limit, if the force is taken off the sample, it will not return to its original
size and shape, permanent deformation has occurred. The Proportional Limit is
the point at which the deformation is no longer directly proportional to the applied
force (Hooke's Law no longer holds). Although these two points are slightly
different, we will treat them as the same in this course.
Next, rather than examining the applied force and resulting deformation, we will
instead graph the axial stress verses the axial strain (diagram 3). We have
defined the axial stress earlier. The axial strain is defined as the fractional change
in length or Strain = (deformation of member) divided by the (original
length of member) , Strain is often represented by the Greek symbol epsilon(),
and the deformation is often represented by the Greek symbol delta(), so we may
(where Lo is the original length of the member) Strain
write: Strain
has no units - since its length divided by length, however it is sometimes
expressed as 'in./in.' in some texts.
As we see from diagram 3, the Stress verses Strain graph has the same shape and
regions as the force verses deformation graph in diagram 2. In the elastic (linear)
region, since stress is directly proportional to strain, the ratio of stress/strain will
be a constant (and actually equal to the slope of the linear portion of the graph).
This constant is known as Young's Modulus, and is usually symbolized by an E or
Y. We will use E for Young's modulus. We may now write Young's Modulus =
. (This is another form of Hooke's Law.)
Stress/Strain, or:
The value of Young's modulus - which is a measure of the amount of force needed
to produce a unit deformation - depends on the material. Young's Modulus for
Steel is 30 x 106 lb/in2, for Aluminum E = 10 x 106 lb/in2, and for Brass E
= 15 x 106 lb/in2. For more values, select: Young's Modulus - Table.
To summarize our stress/strain/Hooke's Law relationships up to this point, we
have:
The last relationship is just a combination of the first three, and says simply that
the amount of deformation which occurs in a member is equal to the product of
the force in the member and the length of the member (usually in inches) divided
by Young's Modulus for the material, and divided by the cross sectional area of the
member. To see applications of these relationships, we now will look at several
examples.
Continue to:
or Select:
Text Version
Streaming
Media Version
Step I: As the first step in our solution, we apply static equilibrium conditions to
determine the value of the external support reactions (the process we studied in
Topic 1 - Statics). Our, hopefully familiar, procedure is as follows:
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Stress/strse32a.htm (1 of 3)6/28/2005 2:03:22 PM
1: Draw a free body diagram showing and labeling all load forces and support
forces, as well as any needed angles and dimensions (Diagram 2).
2: Resolve all forces into their x and y components.
3: Apply the static equilibrium conditions.
Sum Fx = Ax - E cos (30o) = 0
Sum Fy = Ay + E sin (30o) - 10,000 lbs - 20,000 lbs = 0
Sum TA = (20,000 lbs)(4.8 ft) + (10,000 lbs)(16 ft) + E cos (30o)(2 ft) - E sin
(30o)(23.46 ft) = 0
Solving for the unknowns: E = 25,600 lb.; Ax = 22,170 lb.; Ay = 17,200 lb.
Step II. Now that we have the values of the external support forces, we
determine the value of the force in the internal member in which we would like to
find the stress. In this particular problem, this is quite easy once we recognize
that at point E, there is only one axial member (CE) attached to the wall.
Therefore the force of the wall acting on member CE is equal to the internal force
in the member itself: Force in CE = 25,600 lb.
Once we have the force in member CE, we can apply the appropriate stress/strain
relationships and solve for the quantities of interest.
Return to:
Topic 3.2 - Stress,Strain & Hooke's Law - II
or Select:
Topic 3: Stress, Strain & Hooke's Law - Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
Part I. To solve the problem we first need to determine the external support
forces acting on the structure. We proceed using our static equilibrium procedure
(from Topic 1 - Statics)
1: Draw a free body diagram showing and labeling all load forces and support
(reaction) forces, as well as any needed angles and dimensions. (See Diagram 2)
Once we know the tension in section AB of member ABD, we find the stress from
our relationship Stress = F/A = 24,000 lb/(3.14 x .52) = 30,600 psi.
We then use the same approach with section BC of member ABC. We cut member
ABC between point B and point C, and apply static equilibrium principles to the top
section. Diagram 5 is the free body diagram of that section, and by simply
summing forces in the y-direction, we see that the internal force BC (which
becomes an external force when we cut the member) must be 16,000 lb. for
equilibrium.
The stress in section BC is then given by Stress = F/A = 16,000 lb/(3.14 x .52)
Stress (BC) = 20,400 psi.
Part III. To determine the movement of point C is a relatively simple problem
when we realize that the movement of point C will be equal to the deformation
Part I. To solve the problem we first need to determine the external support
forces acting on the structure. We proceed using our static equilibrium procedure
(from Topic 1 - Statics)
1: Draw a free body diagram showing and labeling all load forces and support
(reaction) forces, as well as any needed angles and dimensions.
2: Resolve forces into x and y components. All the forces are acting in the ydirection, as is shown in the FBD.
3: Apply the equilibrium conditions.
Sum Fy = Ay + Ey - 30,000 lb. - 10,000 lb. = 0
Sum TB = (-30,000 lb.)(4 ft) + Ey(10 ft) - (10,000 lb.)(12ft) = 0
Solving for the unknowns: Ey = 24,000 lb.; Ay = 16,000 lb.
Part II. Since both the steel member AB and the aluminum member DE are single
axial members connected to the supporting ceiling, the external forces exerted by
the ceiling on the members is also equal to the internal forces in the members.
Thus FAB = 16,000 lb. (tension), FDE = 24,000 lb. (tension). To find the
stress in each cable is now straight forward. We apply the stress equation
(from the Stress / Strain / Hooke's Law relationships shown to the right).
So, Stress AB = F/A = 16,000 lbs/.5 in2 = 32,000 psi., Stress DE = F/A =
24,000 lbs/.5 in2 = 48,000 psi.
Part III To find the movement of point F requires us to use a bit of geometry.
Point F moves since both member AB and ED deform and member BCDFG moves
downward according to these deformations.
1: Calculate deformation of members AB and ED.
DefAB = (FL / AE)AB = (16,000 lbs)(120 in) / (30*106 lbs/in2)(.5 in2) = .128 in
DefED = (FL / AE)ED = (24,000 lbs)(120 in) / (10*106 lbs/in2)(.5 in2) = .576 in
2: Movement of point F. In Diagram 3 we have shown the initial and final
position (exaggerated) of member BCDFG.
Point B moves down .128 inches (the deformation of member AB), point D moves
down .576 inches (the deformation of member DE). Point F moves down an
intermediate amount. To determine this we have drawn a horizontal line from the
final position of point B across to the right side of the beam as shown. From this
we see that the distance point F moves down is .128 inches + "x" (where x is the
distance below the horizontal line as shown in the diagram). We can determine the
value of x from proportionality (since similar triangles are involved), and write:
(x / 12 ft) = (.448 in / 10 ft). Solving for x we find: x = .5376 inches.
So the Movement of F = .128 inches + .5376 inches = .666 inches
Return to:
Topic 3.2: Stress, Strain & Hooke's Law - II
or Select:
Topic 3: Stress, Strain & Hooke's Law - Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
solution211
Solution:
PART A:
External support reaction - Statics:
STEP 1: Draw a free body diagram showing and labeling all load forces and support (reaction) forces,
solution211
as well as any
needed angles and
dimensions.
STEP 2: Break
already in x
and y direction
y components.
STEP 3: Apply
the equilibrium
conditions.
Sum Fx = Ax =
Sum Fy = Ay +
PART B:
STEP 1: Take out member ABC. Analyze force acting on it. Draw a free body
solution211
diagram of ABC
STEP 2: Resolve all forces into x and y components
STEP 3: Apply equilibrium conditions.
Sum Fx = Bx = 0
Sum Fy = 24,000 lbs - By - 16,000 lbs = 0
Solving for the unknowns:
By = 8,000 lbs
Now to find the force in section AB of member ABC.
Cut member between points A and B. Look at top section (see diagram).
The internal force in section AB must be 24,000 lbs (equal to A) for
equilibrium.
StressAB = F/A = 24,000 lbs/.785 in2 = 30,600 psi
solution211
diagram).
PART C:
C. Def = Deformation
solution212
Solution:
Part A. External support reaction - Statics:
STEP 1: Draw a free
body diagram showing
and labeling all load
forces and support
(reaction) forces, as well
as any needed angles and
dimensions.
STEP 2: Break any
forces not already in
x and y direction
into their x and y
components.
STEP 3: Apply the
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Stests/stress/sol212.htm (1 of 2)6/28/2005 2:03:48 PM
solution212
equilibrium
conditions.
Sum Fx = Ax - E cos
(30o) = 0
Sum Fy = Ay + E sin (30o) - 10,000 lbs - 20,000 lbs = 0
Sum TA = (20,000 lbs)(4.8 ft) + (10,000 lbs)(16 ft) + E cos (30o)(2 ft) - E sin
(30o)(23.46 ft)
Solving for the unknowns:
E = 25,600 lbs; A = 22,170 lbs; A = 17,200 lbs
x
Part B. Stress
CE
solution213
Solution:
solution213
Part B. Stress
AB
solution214
Unless otherwise indicated, all joints and support points are assumed to be
pinned or hinged joints.
Solution:
solution214
Part A. External
support reaction Statics:
STEP 1: Draw a free
body diagram showing
and labeling all load
forces and support
(reaction) forces, as
well as any needed
angles and dimensions.
STEP 2: Break any
forces not already in x
and y direction into
their x and y
components.
STEP 3: Apply the
equilibrium conditions.
Sum Fx = Ax - E cos
(30o) = 0
Sum Fy = Ay + E sin (30o) - 10,000 lbs - 12,000 lbs = 0
Sum TA = -E sin (30o)(4 ft) + E cos (30o)(16 ft) - (10,000 lbs)(4.8 ft)- (12,000 lbs)
(9.6 ft)= 0
Part B. Stress
CE
solution215
Unless otherwise indicated, all joints and support points are assumed to be
Solution:
Part A.
STEP 1: Draw
a free body
diagram
showing and
labeling all load
forces and
support
(reaction)
forces, as well
as any needed
angles and
dimensions.
STEP 2:
Break any
forces not
already in x
and y
direction
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Stests/stress/sol215.htm (1 of 4)6/28/2005 2:04:06 PM
solution215
fashion.
Sum Fx = Ex = 0
Sum Fy = Fy + Ey - 9,000 lbs = 0
Sum TE = -Fy (2 ft) + (9,000 lbs)(4 ft) = 0
solution215
Part B. Stress
DF
= 40,740 psi
Part C. Def = Deformation
STEP 1: Point C moves due to the deformation of cable FD. So we first determine
the deformation of FD.
DefFD = (FL / EA) = (18,000 lbs)(6 ft)(12 in/ft) / (30 *106)(.4417 in2) = .0978 in
STEP 2: Point C moves in proportion to how much
point D moves (see diagram).
Mov. C / 4 ft = Mov. D / 2 ft
Mov. C / 4 ft = .0978 in/ 2 ft
Mov. C = .1956 in
Mov. B / 6 ft = Mov. C / 8 ft
Mov. B = .1467 in
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Stests/stress/sol215.htm (3 of 4)6/28/2005 2:04:06 PM
solution215
solution216
Unless otherwise indicated, all joints and support points are assumed to be
Solution:
Part A:
solution216
solution216
Sum Fx = Ax = 0
Sum Fy = Ay - Cy + 24,000 lbs = 0
Sum TB = -Ay (3 ft) + (24,000 lbs)(3 ft) =
0
Solving for the unknowns:
A = 24,000 lbs; C = 48,000 lbs
y
Part B. Stress
BC
= F/A = 48,000
Mov. E = Mov. D + (FL / EA)DE = .1536 in + (24,000 lbs)(24 in) / (30*106 lbs/in2)
(.5 in2)
Mov. E = .1536 in + .0384 in = .192 in
STEP 4: Finally the movement of point
G is proportional to the movement of
point E and we may write:
Mov. G / 4 ft = Mov. E / 2 ft
Mov. G / 4 ft = .192 in / 2 ft
Mov. G = .384 in
the other two equations, in finding Ay, FSt, FAl.) We might try to take the structure
apart in some way, or redraw the FBD, but none of this will help. Static
equilibrium conditions alone are not enough to solve this problem - it is
statically indeterminate. Another way to state this difficulty is that we need
another independent equation to solve for the unknowns. The deformations of the
steel and aluminum members will give us this additional equation..
Part II. - Deformation Equation
Step 1 is to find some general relationship between the deformations of the
members of the structure. We may get this from the way the problem is stated, or
often from the geometry of the structure - as in this case. The effect of the 10,000
lb. load will be to elongate both the steel and aluminum members which will cause
member ABDF to rotate downward about hinged point A. We diagram this,
showing and labeling the deformations involved. This is somewhat like a Free Body
Diagram, but with deformation effects shown. See Diagram 3. We now write a
general relationship between the deformations of the members which we can get
from the geometry of the problem. Since member ABDF is pinned at point A, as it
rotates downward we see we can write (from similar triangles):
This is our additional equation which we will use in combination with the static
equilibrium equations to find the external forces acting on the structure. At first it
may not be clear how we can use this equation, since it involves deformations, not
forces as in the equilibrium equations. However, if we recall our stress/strain/
FAl = 10,900 lb., and FSt = 8175 lb. We can now also solve for Ay, finding Ay =
10,075 lb
We find the stress from: Stress Steel = 8175 lb/ .5 in2 = 16, 350 lb/in2,
Stess Aluminum = 10,900 lb/1 in2 = 10,900 lb/in2.
And finally we can find the movement of point F by first finding the elongation of
member DE, the aluminum member, from Def. = FL/EA = (10,900 lb * 72 in.)/
(10 x 106 lb.in2 * 1 in2) = .0785 in. Point F moves in proportion to the
elongation of member DE, and we may write: .0785 in./12 ft = Move. F/18 ft,
We have now solved our statically indeterminate problem and determined the
values of the external support reactions acting on the structure, the stresses, and
Example 1 ; Example 2
or Select:
Our first step is to apply our static equilibrium procedure to our structure
Part I - Static Equilibrium Analysis
1: Draw a free body diagram showing and labeling all load forces and support
(reaction) forces, as well as any needed angles and dimensions. In Diagram 2, a
FBD of the structure is shown. At point B, where member ABCD is pinned to the
floor, we replace the pin by support forces Bx and By. The brass and steel
members are pinned to the ceiling. Normally we would replace the pins by
horizontal and vertical support forces, however in this case we can do better
(meaning less unknowns). Since both the steel and brass members have forces
acting on them at only two points (each end), they are axial members and are in
simple tension or compression. The 20,000 lb. load acting at end D tries to rotate
the bar ABCD downward about point B. Thus putting the brass member (AF) in
compression and the steel member (CE) in tension. As a result, the ceiling acts on
the members as shown in the free body diagram.
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Stress/strse33a.htm (1 of 4)6/28/2005 2:04:33 PM
If we simplify this equation we obtain: FSt = .6 FBr We now substitute this into
our torque equation from static equilibrium equations (shown on right)
: Bx = 0
: By -FBr + FSt - 20,000 lb. = 0
: + FBr (10 ft.) + FSt (6 ft.) - 20,000 lb. (12 ft.) = 0
and obtain: (FBr)(10 ft.) + (.6 FBr) (6 ft.) - 20,000 lb. (12 ft.) = 0; and solving
we have:
FBr = 17,650 lb., and FSt = 10,600 lb. We can now also solve for By, finding By
= 27,050 lb
We find the stress from: Stress Steel = 10,600 lb/ .75 in2 = 14,130 lb/in2,
Stress Brass = 17,650 lb/1.5 in2 = 11,770 lb/in2.
And finally we can find the movement of point D by first finding the elongation of
member CE, the steel member, from Def. = FL/EA = (10,600 lb * 96 in.)/(30
x 106 lb.in2 * .75 in2) = .0452 in. Point D moves in proportion to the elongation
of member CE, and we may write: .0452 in./6ft = Move. D/12 ft, solving
Move. D = .0904 in.
We have now solved our statically indeterminate problem and determined the
values of the external support reactions acting on the structure, the stresses, and
the movement of point D.
Return to:
Topic 3.3: Statically Indeterminate Structures
or Select:
Topic 3: Stress, Strain & Hooke's Law - Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
now have our additional relationship between the forces. After substituting in the
values for the members we have:
( FSt *72")/(30 x 106 lb./in2 * .5 in2) = ( FBr * 48")/(15 x 106 lb./in2
* .75 in2 )
If we simplify this equation we obtain: FSt = .89 FBr We now substitute this into
In additional to Axial (or normal) Stress and Strain (discussed in topic 2.1and
2.2), we may also have what is known as Shear Stress and Shear Strain.In
Diagram 1 we have shown a metal rod which is solidly attached to the floor. We
then exert a force, F, acting at angle theta with respect to the horizontal, on the
rod. The component of the Force perpendicular to the surface area will produce an
Axial Stress on the rod given by Force perpendicular to an area divided by
the area, or:
The component of the Force parallel to the area will also effect the rod by
producing a Shear Stress, defined as Force parallel to an area divided by the
area, or:
where the Greek letter, Tau, is used to represent Shear Stress. The
units of both Axial and Shear Stress will normally be lb/in2 or N/m2.
Shear Strain:
Just as an axial stress results in an axial strain, which is the change in the length
divided by the original length of the member, so does shear stress produce a
shear strain. Both Axial Strain and Shear Strain are shown in Diagram 2. The
shear stress produces a displacement of the rod as indicated in the right drawing
from its
, L and the side of the rod, we see that the Shear Strain,
/L , is also equal
to the tangent of the angle gamma, and since the amount of displacement is quite
small the tangent of the angle is approximately equal to the angle itself. Or we
may write:
Shear Strain =
As with Axial Stress and Strain, Shear Stress and Strain are proportional in the
elastic region of the material. This relationship may be expressed as G = Shear
Stress/Shear Strain, where G is a property of the material and is called the
Modulus of Rigidity (or at times, the Shear Modulus) and has units of lb/in2. The
Modulus of Rigidity for Steel is approximately 12 x 106 lb/in2.
If a graph is made of Shear Stress versus Shear Strain, it will normally exhibit
the same characteristics as the graph of Axial Stress versus Axial Strain. There
is an Elastic Region in which the Stress is directly proportional to the Strain. The
point at which the Elastic Region ends is called the elastic limit, or the
proportional limit. In actuality, these two points are not quite the same. The
Elastic Limit is the point at which permanent deformation occurs, that is, after
the elastic limit, if the force is taken off the sample, it will not return to its original
size and shape, permanent deformation has occurred. The Proportional Limit is
the point at which the deformation is no longer directly proportional to the applied
force (Hooke's Law no longer holds). Although these two points are slightly
different, we will treat them as the same in this course. There is a Plastic
Region, where a small increase in the Shear Stress results in a larger increase in
Shear Strain, and finally there is a Failure Point where the sample fails in shear.
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Stress/strs34.htm (2 of 3)6/28/2005 2:04:48 PM
While we will not go in any great depth, at this point, with respect to Shear Stress
and Strain, we will look at several relative easy examples. Please Select:
Example 1 - Shear Stress & Strain
Example 2 - Shear Stress & Strain.
or Select:
Topic 3: Stress, Strain & Hooke's Law - Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
As we examine the structure we see the area of the bolt where the two plates
surfaces come together are in shear. That is, if we examine one bolt, the top of
the bolt experiences a force to the left while the bottom of the bolt experiences
and an equal force to the right. (See Diagram 2.) The surface area between the
top and bottom interface is in shear. We assume the bolts carry the load equally,
and so each bolt "carries" 10,000 lb. From this we can calculate the shear stress in
a straight forward manner from one of our Shear Stress/Strain Relationships:
In similar manner the Shear Strain can be found from the appropriate form of
Hooke's Law:
To determine the shear stress we first need to determine the force trying to shear
the key. We do this by realizing, after a little thought, that the driving force is
really producing a torque about the center of the shaft, and that the torque
produced by the driving force(s) must equal the torque produced by the force (of
the inner ring) acting on the shear key. In our problem the two 500 lb. driving
forces are acting a distance of 2 ft from the center of the 1 ft diameter shaft.
Calculating torque about the center of the shaft we have:
500 lb.(2 ft) + 500 lb.(2 ft) = 2000 ft-lb. This must also be the torque
produced by the force acting on the upper half of the shear key (shown in Diagram
4). So we may write: 500 lb.(2 ft) + 500 lb.(2 ft) = 2000 ft-lb. = F (.5 ft),
Solving for F = 4000 lb. This is the force acing on the top half of the shear key.
There is a equal force in the opposite direction acting on the bottom half of the
shear key. These two forces place the horizontal cross section of the key in shear.
The key is 1/2 inch wide, by 3/4 inch high, by 1 inch deep as shown in Diagram 4.
We calculate the shear stress by:
Shear Stress = Force parallel to area / area = 4000 lb./ (1/2" * 1") =
8000 lb/in2.
In addition to the shear stress on the horizontal cross sectional area, the forces
acting on the key also place the key itself into compression. The compressive
stress (also called the bearing stress) on the top half of the shear key will be given
by:
Compression (Bearing) Stress = Force normal to the area / area = 4000
lb. / (3/8" * 1") = 10, 700 lb/in2. There is an equal compressive stress on the
bottom of the shear key.
Return to:
Topic 3.4: Shear Stress & Strain
or Select:
Topic 3: Stress, Strain & Hooke's Law - Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Stress/strsp35a.htm6/28/2005 2:05:11 PM
Select:
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Stress/strsp35b.htm (1 of 2)6/28/2005 2:05:18 PM
of 1 inch. Member ABC is also a steel member. Both members are attached to the
wall by pinned joints. If we assume that member AB does not bend, determine the
2. In the structure shown to the right, member AB is a Brass rod with a diameter
of 1.5 inches. Member BCD is also a Brass member. Both members are pinned to
the wall. If we assume that member BCD does not bend, determine the stress in
3 In the structure shown to the right, member AB is a cable and BCD is a solid
rigid member (that is, it does not bend). Member BCD is pinned at point E, and is
Member AB is a steel cable with a diameter of 1 inch. You may assume that point
B moves "down" the amount cable AB deforms. For this structure, determine the
5. In the structure shown to the right member ABD is a solid rigid member pinned
to the wall at A, supported by steel cable BC, and connected to member EFG by
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Stress/strsp35c.htm (3 of 4)6/28/2005 2:05:25 PM
steel cable DE. (Cables BC and DE each have a cross sectional area of .5 square
inches.) Member EFG is supported by a roller at F and is loaded with 12000 lb. at
G. For this structure determine the stress in cable BC, and the movement of point
G.
(answers: Fy = 36,000 lb., ED = 24,000 lb., Ay = 24,000 lb., BC = 48,000 lb.)
(answers: Stress BC = 96,000 psi, Movement of G = .384")
Select:
Topic 3: Stress, Strain & Hooke's Law - Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
and then held between two rigid walls as shown. A force of 40,000 lb acting to the
left is applied at junction B. This force will compress the steel member while
stretching the aluminum member. The cross sectional areas and lengths of the
steel and aluminum rods are respectively 1.5 in2, 6 ft, 1 in2, 10 ft as shown in the
diagram. Young's modulus for steel is 30 x 106 lb/in2; Young's modulus for
aluminum is 10 x 106 lb/in2. Determine the stress that develops in each member,
(answers: Faluminum = 4,700 lb., Fsteel = 35,300, Stress-Al = 4700 psi, Stress-St =
2. In the structure shown, steel rod AB, aluminum rod BC, and brass rod CD are
joined together and then held between two rigid walls as shown. A force of 40,000
lb acting to the left is applied at junction B, and a force of 20,000 lb acting to the
left is applied at junction C. The cross sectional areas and lengths of the steel,
aluminum, and brass rods are respectively 1.5 in2, 6 ft; 1 in2, 10 ft; .75 in2, 8 ft
as shown in the diagram. Young's modulus for steel is 30 x 106 lb/in2; Young's
modulus for aluminum is 10 x 106 lb/in2; Young's modulus for brass is 15 x 106 lb/
in2. Determine the stress that develops in each member, and determine the
deformation of the aluminum rod.
(answers: Fst = 44,800 lb. comp., Fal = 4,800 lb.comp., Fbr = 15,000 lb. tens. )
(answers: Stressst = 29,900 psi., Stressal = 4,800 psi., Stressbr = 20,000 psi, def.
al = -.0576")
3 In the structure shown, member ABCD is pinned to the ceiling at point A, and is
supported by two steel rods, FB and EC, as shown in the Diagram. A load of 8000
lb. is applied at point D. Young's modulus for Steel is 30 x 106 lb/in2. Determine
the stress in each rod, and the movement of point D.(answers: StressFB = StressEC
= 8150 psi; Md=.0448")
4. In the structure shown, two aluminum rods and a threaded steel rod connect to
vertical plates, as shown in the diagram. If the structure is initially unstressed and
the nut on the threaded steel rod in screwed in .25 inches, what is the stress that
develops in the aluminum and steel members?
(answers: StressST = 71,300 psi., StressAl = 80,200 psi.)
5. In the structure shown, solid rigid member ABCDE is pinned to the wall at point
A, and supported by steel member BG and aluminum member DF, with lengths
and dimensions as shown. A load of 20,000 lb. is applied a point C. Determine the
stress that develops in the steel and aluminum members, and the movement of
point E. (answers: StressST = 12,860 psi., StressAl = 8570 psi.)
(Movement of E = .123")
Select:
Topic 3: Stress, Strain & Hooke's Law - Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
A. Draw a Free Body Diagram showing all support forces and loads.
B. Determine the axial stress in cable DF.
C. Determine the movement of point B due to the applied load.
Est = 30 x 10 6 psi; Ebr = 15 x 10 6 psi; Eal = 10 x 10 6 psi
Unless otherwise indicated, all joints and support points are assumed to be
2.) In the structure shown horizontal member BCDE is supported by vertical brass
member, AB, an aluminum member EF, and by a roller at point C. Both AB and EF
have cross sectional areas of .5 in2. The structure is initially unstressed and then a
load of 24,000 lb. is applied at point D. For this structure:
A. Draw a Free Body Diagram showing all support forces and loads.
B. Determine the axial stress that develops in aluminum member EF.
C. Determine the resulting movement of point E.
Est = 30 x 10 6 psi; Ebr = 15 x 10 6 psi; Eal = 10 x 10 6 psi
Unless otherwise indicated, all joints and support points are assumed to be
Select:
Topic 3: Stress, Strain & Hooke's Law - Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
= .075 inches
(The length of the rod was converted into inches in the equation since the
deformations are normally quite small.) We see the deformation is indeed quite
small, and in many cases the thermal deformation has no significant effect on the
structure. However, if the structure or members of the structure are constrained
such that the thermal expansion can not occur, then a significant thermal stress
may arise which can effect the structure substantially - and which we will address
shortly.
In addition to the length, both the area and volume of a material will change with
a corresponding change in temperature. The resulting changes in area and volume
are given by:
; and
These formulas, as written, are not exact. In the derivations [using (L + L)2 for
area, and (L + L)3 for Volume] there are cross terms involving the linear
When I ask this question in my classroom it is not unusual for the majority of the
answers to be incorrect. Our first thought often is that since the plate is
expanding, the hole is the center must be getting smaller. However, this is not the
case. The atoms/molecules all move away from each other with the result that the
hole expands just as if it were made of the same material as the plate. This is also
true of volume expansion. The inside volume of a glass bottle expands as if it were
made of glass.
A somewhat more interesting aspect of thermal expansion is when it "can't" - that
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Stress/strs38.htm (2 of 3)6/28/2005 2:05:48 PM
is, what happens when we constrain a structure or member so it can not expand.
(or contract)? When this happens a force and resulting stress develop in the
structure. A simple way to determine the amount of stress is to let the material
expand freely due to thermal expansion, and then compress it back to its original
length (a mechanical deformation) . See diagram below.
that we can cancel the length L from each side of the equation, and then cross
Example:
A twelve foot horizontal steel rod is fixed between two concrete walls. The rod is
initially at temperature of 0oF and experiences a temperature increase to a final
temperature of 80oF. If the steel rod was initially unstressed, what is the stress in
the steel at 80oF? [Young's modulus for steel is 30 x 106 lb/in2, and the coefficient
of linear expansion of steel is 6.5 x 10-6/oF.]
Solution:
In a completely constrained problem, where the member can not move at all, the
= (6.5 x 10-6/oF)
thermal stress which develops is given by:
(80oF - 0oF)(30 x 106 lb/in2) = 15,600 lb/in2.
Notice that this is quite a sizable stress. In this case there was no initial stress, so
the stress which developed is well within the range of allowable stresses for steel.
However, there are many cases where structures and materials are near or at
their allowable stresses. In that case, if a thermal stress develops, the total stress
may well exceed the allowable stress and cause the structure to fail. This, of
course, is the reason bridges are built with expansion joints which allow the
structure to expand and contract freely and thus avoid thermal stresses.
Additionally, this is why concrete sidewalks are built with spaces separating
adjacent slabs, allowing expansions to avoid thermal stresses. Concrete highways
used to also have expansion spaces built-in, however modern concrete highways
are designed without expansion spaces to withstand thermal stresses which
develop. Normally they do withstand these stresses, but occasionally long hot
periods will allow stresses to built up until the highway actually exploded in a area,
Solution:
The first part of the solution will be to consider the static equilibrium conditions for
the structure. However to do this effectively we first need to consider the physical
effects of the temperature change to determine the directions of the forces acting
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Stress/strse382a.htm (1 of 4)6/28/2005 2:06:00 PM
on the structure. We do this by first considering how much the brass and
aluminum members would expand if they were free to expand, due to the
temperature increase.
Both the brass and aluminum members try to expand. In Diagram 2 we have
shown the amount each member would expand if free to do so. However both can
not expand - one will "win" causing the other to contract. We will assume the
brass "wins" forcing the aluminum to compress. The horizontal member, ABC, will
rotate upward about point A as shown in Diagram 2. That is, the brass will
expand, but not as much as it would if unconstrained - since it is compressing the
aluminum which is in turn pushing back on the brass, putting it into compression
also. Thus both the brass and aluminum members are in compression. We have
shown in Diagram 2 the direction the external support forces will act on the
structure. Notice the forces at E and D are along the direction of the members.
This is due to the fact that the brass and aluminum are axial members, and thus
simply in tension or compression. At point A where the structure is pinned to the
wall, we have put in horizontal and vertical support forces Ax and Ay. We are now
ready to apply static equilibrium conditions.
PART I: STATICS
STEP 1: Draw a free body diagram showing and labeling all load forces and
support (reaction) forces, as well as any needed angles and dimensions. (Already
done in Diagram 2) Apply equilibrium conditions:
Sum Fx = Ax = 0 (There is no external horizontal force acting at point A)
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Stress/strse382a.htm (2 of 4)6/28/2005 2:06:00 PM
total
=[
positive (use + sign) if the member is in tension, and the mechanical deformation
term is negative (use - sign) if the member is in compression. If we substitute this
expression for the deformations into our general relationship ( br = -1.75 a) we
obtain:
[
- FL / EA ]br = -1.75[
sign for each mechanical term since both members are in compression. We now
substitute in numeric values given in our problem and get:
[(20x10-6 / oC)(40oC)(96 in) - Fbr (96 in) / (15x106 lbs./in2 )(.5 in2)] =
1.75[(23x10-6 / oC)(40oC)(120 in) - Fal (120 in) / (10x106 lbs./in2 )(.75
in2)].
(Notice that we need not be concerned that the temperature is in Celsius rather
than Fahrenheit, since the linear coefficient of expansion is also per o Celsius, the
units cancel.) Then after combining terms we have:
(0.0768 - 1.28x10-5 Fbr ) = (-0.193 + 2.8x10-5 Fal ) or 1.28x10-5 Fbr + 2.8x10
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Stress/strse382a.htm (3 of 4)6/28/2005 2:06:00 PM
Fal = 0.27
This is our additional equation. Now from our torque equation from static
equilibrium in Part I we have Fal = 1.75 Fbr We now substitute this into our
deformation equation above obtaining:
1.28x10-5 Fbr + 2.8x10-5 (1.75 Fbr ) = 0.27 or
6.18 x 10-5 (in./lb.) Fbr = .27 in.
solving:
Fbr = 4,370 lbs.; Fal = 7,650 lbs. The stress in brass = F/A = 4,370 lbs./.5
in2 = 8,740 lbs./in2 The stress in aluminum = F/A = 7,650 lbs./.75 in2 =
10,200 lbs./in2
PART III: Deformation of Brass Member
The deformation of the brass member may now be found from the general
- FL / EA ]br or putting in values
expression for the deformation: [
Brass=
in2)] = 0.210 in. (Since this deformation is positive, it means brass member CD
does expand as we assumed. If the value were negative it would have meant that
the brass member was actually compressed by the aluminum member, which then
would have expanded. However the values found for the forces and the stress
would have been correct in either case.)
Return to:
Topic 3.81: Thermal Stress, Strain & Deformation II
or Select:
Topic 3. Stress, Strain & Hooke's - Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
Solution:
PART I: STATICS
In this problem we first consider how much the brass and steel member would
expand, if free to do so, due to the temperature increase. As the coefficient of
expansion of the brass is larger than the coefficient of expansion of the steel, the
brass would expand more if free to do so. (See Diagram 2)
As the brass expands it pulls on the steel placing the steel in tension. The steel
pulls back on the brass placing the brass in compression. The support reactions,
reflecting these forces, are shown in diagram 2. Notice that the brass and steel
members have forces acting on them at only two points, so they are axial
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Stress/strse382b.htm (1 of 3)6/28/2005 2:06:05 PM
members. This also means that the external forces on the members due to the
floor are equal to the forces in the members.
Additionally we note that the forces in the brass member are equal from symmetry
of the structure. (or if we mentally sum torque about point D, the center of the
member BDF, we see that forces in the brass members would produce opposing
torque which would need to be equal and opposite for equilibrium. Since the
distances are equal, the forces in the brass members need to be equal to produce
equal amounts of torque.)
The result of the brass and steel members working against each other is that the
horizontal member BDF moves to an intermediate position, as shown in Diagram
2. We are now ready to proceed with the Statics.
STEP 1: Draw a free body diagram showing and labeling all load forces and
support (reaction) forces, as well as any needed angles and dimensions. (Diagram
2)
Sum Fx = 0
Sum Fy = Fbr - Fst + Fbr = 0
Sum TorqueB = -Fst (6 ft) + Fbr (12 ft) = 0
The torque equation gives us: Fst = 2 Fb and the sum of y forces also gives us:
r
Fst = 2 Fbr
We do not have enough equations at this point to solve the problem. We need an
additional equation, which we will obtain from the deformation relationships.
FL / EA ], we substitute
Then solving Fbr = 1,200 lb.; and Fst = 2 Fbr = 2,400 lbs, and so the Stress in
Solution:
PART I: STATICS
In this problem we first consider the effect of the change in temperature. Even
though the total length of the three members is fixed, the members may expand
or contract against each other. Since all three members are trying to expand they
put each other into compression, and also push outward on the walls. In response
an external force due to the wall acts inward on the members at each end as
shown in Diagram 2.
With a little thought we realize that the forces in each member are the same and
equal to the force exerted by the wall on the structure. This may be seen in
Diagram 3, where we have cut the structure through the steel member. Since the
structure is in equilibrium, this section of the structure must also be in equilibrium.
But we can see that this is only possible if there is an internal force in the steel
member which is equal and opposite to the force exerted by the wall.
And, of course, this same argument would hold if we cut the structure through the
aluminum member, or through the brass member (as shown in Diagram 4)
So we can write (from static equilibrium) that Fst = Fal = Fbr = F
they are all in compression.. We now substitute values from our problem into the
[(6.5 x 10-6/oF)(80oF)(72 in) - F (72 in) / (30x106 lbs/in2 )(1.5 in2)] + [(13 x 10-6/
oF)(80oF)(120 in) - F (120 in) / (10x106 lbs/in2 )(1 in2)] + [(11 x 10-6/oF)(80oF)
.0374 in. + .1248 in. + .0845 in. = [1.6 x 10-6 in/lb (F) + 12 x 10-6 in/lb (F) +
Now that we have the amount of force in the aluminum member, its deformation
- FL / EA ], or
solution221
psi; Ebr = 15 x 10
-6
/ C; abr = 20 x 10
Est = 30 x 10
ast = 12 x 10
6
-6
psi; Eal = 10 x 10
o
psi
-6
/ C; aal = 23 x 10
/ C
Unless otherwise indicated, all joints and support points are assumed to be
pinned or hinged joints.
Solution:
PART A: STATICS
solution221
solution221
BR 6ft
ST 10ft
BR total
ST total
The total deformation depends on the thermal deformation and the mechanical deformation and can be
expressed as:
d
total
= (a DTL FL/EA);
BR
ST
solution221
-6 o
BR
(72 in) + F
ST
-6
-6
-6
ST
OR 2.88x10
ST
-6
+ 9.6x10
= .6F
-6 o
+ 2.88x10
BR
ST
BR
= 0.026 in
= 0.046
(10 ft) - F
BR
(6 ft) = 0 OR
BR
BR
= 4,060 lbs F
ST
= 2,440 lbs
2
Then the stress in brass member BE is s = F/A = 4,060 lbs/ .5 in = 8,120 lbs/
in
PART C: MOVEMENT
Finally, point D moves in proportion to the movement of point C (which is equal to
the deformation of member CF), and we can write:
Mov. D / 12 ft = CF / 10 ft
Mov. D / 12 ft = [ (12x10-6/oC) ( +50oC) (72 in) + (2,440 lbs) (72 in) / (30x106
lbs/in2) (.5 in2) ] / 10 ft
or Mov. D = (12 ft) [ 0.0549 in / 10 ft ] = 0.0659 in
solution222
psi; Ebr = 15 x 10
-6
/ C; abr = 20 x 10
Est = 30 x 10
ast = 12 x 10
6
-6
psi; Eal = 10 x 10
o
psi
-6
/ C; aal = 23 x 10
/ C
Unless otherwise indicated, all joints and support points are assumed to be
pinned or hinged joints.
Solution:
PART A: STATICS
solution222
solution222
shown in diagram 2.
The deformation of the members depend on both the thermal deformation and the
= [TL
(FL/EA) ]material
-[(12x10-6/oC) (-50oC) (72 in) + Dy (72 in) / ( 30x106 lbs/in2) (.75 in2)] =
+[(12x10-6/oC) (-50oC) (96 in) + Ay (96 in) / ( 15x106 lbs/in2) (.5 in2)]
Combining terms, the equation becomes:
-[-0.0432 + (3.2x10-6 ) Dy ] = [-0.096 + ( 12.8x10-6 ) Ay ] OR
3.2x10-6 Dy + 12.8x10-6 Ay = 0.139
This is our third equation, we can now substitute our relationship from statics: Ay
=Dy / 2, into the above expression and get:
3.2x10-6 Dy + 12.8x10-6 (Dy / 2) = 0.139
Solving for
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Stests/stress/sol222.htm (3 of 4)6/28/2005 2:06:23 PM
solution222
member(s))
Then to find stress in member CD
2
PART C: MOVEMENT
Point E moves since it is attached to member FE, and its movement is equal to the
deformation of member FE.
-6 o
FE
2
= [ (20x10 / C) (-50 C) (96 in) + (7,250 lbs) (96 in) / (15x10 lbs/
2
in ) (.5 in )] = 0.0496 in
solution223
psi; Ebr = 15 x 10
-6
/ C; abr = 20 x 10
Est = 30 x 10
ast = 12 x 10
6
-6
psi; Eal = 10 x 10
o
psi
-6
/ C; aal = 23 x 10
/ C
Unless otherwise indicated, all joints and support points are assumed to be
pinned or hinged joints.
Solution:
PART A: STATICS
STEP 1: Draw a free
body diagram showing
and labeling all load
forces and support
(reaction) forces, as well
as any needed angles and
dimensions.
solution223
Since both members can not expand as shown (assuming member BCD does not bend), one member will
"win," expanding and compression the other member. We will assume the brass member actually expands,
compression the
aluminum member
(Diagram 3).
Since the two members
are pushing against each
other, both members are
put into compression,
and the support reaction
are as shown in diagram
3.
Now we write the
equilibrium equations:
Sum Fx = 0 (None)
Sum Fy = -FBR + FC FAL = 0
Sum TC = FBR (4 ft) - FAL (12 ft) = 0
Not enough independent equations to solve for our three unknowns, so we need another equation - which
solution223
FL/EA]material so,
3 [ TL - FL/EA]brass = - [ TL - FL/EA]aluminum
3[ (20x10-6/oC) (+60oC) (96 in) - FBR (96 in) / (15x106 lbs/in2) (.5 in2) ] =
[ (23x10-6/oC) (+60oC) (48 in) - FAL (48 in) / (10x106 lbs/in2) (.5 in2) ]
AL
= 3,330 lbs ; F
BR
= 9,900 lbs ; s
AL
in
PART C: MOVEMENT
Mov. B = the deformation of member AB
So, Mov. B = [(20x10-6 / oC)(60oC)(96 in) - (9,900 lbs)(96 in) / (15x106 lbs/in2 )
(.5 in2 )]
solution224
psi; Ebr = 15 x 10
-6
/ C; abr = 20 x 10
Est = 30 x 10
ast = 12 x 10
6
-6
psi; Eal = 10 x 10
o
psi
-6
/ C; aal = 23 x 10
/ C
Unless otherwise indicated, all joints and support points are assumed to be
pinned or hinged joints.
Solution:
PART A : STATICS
solution224
solution224
steel
FL / EA]material ;
so, we obtain
2[ TL + FL / EA]brass = [ TL - FL / EA]steel
and putting values of materials and the structure into this equation we obtain:
2[(20x10-6 / oC)(60oC)(96 in) + Fbr (96 in) / (15x106 lbs/in2 )(.5 in2)] =
[(12x10-6 / oC)(60oC)(48 in) + Fst (48 in) / (30x106 lbs/in2 )(.5 in2)]
or (-0.2304 + 2.56x10-5 Fbr ) = (-0.0346 - 0.32x10-5 Fst )
or 2.56x10-5 Fbr + 0.32x10-5 Fst = 0.196
from our static equilibrium torque equilibrium we had:
-Fbr(4) + Fst(8) = 0 or Fbr = 2Fst , we now substitute this into our deformation equation.
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Stests/stress/sol224.htm (3 of 4)6/28/2005 2:06:34 PM
solution224
and obtain:
solving:
F = 3,600 lbs ; F
st
br
= 7,200 lbs
PART C: MOVEMENT
Point B is attached to member AB and so movement of point B is equal to the
Mov. B = [(20x10-6 / oC)(60oC)(96 in) +(7,200 lbs)(96 in) / (15x106 lbs/in2 )(.5
in2)]
Mov. B = -0.023 in
solution225
psi; Ebr = 15 x 10
-6
/ C; abr = 20 x 10
Est = 30 x 10
ast = 12 x 10
6
-6
psi; Eal = 10 x 10
o
psi
-6
/ C; aal = 23 x 10
/ C
Unless otherwise indicated, all joints and support points are assumed to be
pinned or hinged joints.
Solution:
PART A: STATICS
solution225
solution225
total
= [ TL
FL / EA ], we obtain:
[(20x10-6 / oC)(40oC)(96 in) - Fbr (96 in) / (15x106 lbs/in2 )(.5 in2)] =
[(12x10-6 / oC)(40oC)(96 in) + Fst (96 in) / (30x106 lbs/in2 )(.5 in2)]
or (-0.0768 - 1.28x10-5 Fbr ) = (0.0461 + 0.64x10-5 Fst )
or 1.28x10-5 Fbr + 0.64x10-5 Fst = 0.0307
From our static equilibrium equation in part I, we have : Fst = 2 Fbr
Substituting, we obtain:
0.64x10-5 (2 Fbr ) + 1.28x10-5 (Fbr ) = 0.0307
solving: Fbr = 1,200 lbs ; Fst = 2,400 lbs
Stress in steel = F/A = 2,400 lbs/.75 in2 = 3,200 lbs/in2
PART C: MOVEMENT
Movement of point D. Point D is connected to steel member CD and so moves the
amount CD deforms or
Mov. D = [(12x10-6 / oC)(40oC)(96 in) + (2,400 lbs)(96 in) / (30x106 lbs/in2 )(.75
in2)]
Mov. D = 0.05632 in
solution226
psi; Ebr = 15 x 10
-6
/ C; abr = 20 x 10
Est = 30 x 10
ast = 12 x 10
6
-6
psi; Eal = 10 x 10
o
psi
-6
/ C; aal = 23 x 10
/ C
Unless otherwise indicated, all joints and support points are assumed to be
pinned or hinged joints.
Solution:
Part A: STATICS
solution226
Brass
= 11 x 10-6/oF;
= 6 x 10-6/oF
Young's Modulus:
ESteel = 30 x 106 lb/in2; EAluminum = 10 x 106 lb/in2; EBrass = 15 x 106 lb/
in2; EConcrete = 5 x 106 lb/in2
1. A concrete sidewalk slab is 3 ft. wide by 4 ft. long. If the concrete slab is
constrained so it can not expand, what stress would develop in it due to thermal
effects if it experienced a temperature increase of 60o F? (Stress = 1800 psi.)
2. An aluminum rod and a brass rod are attached to each other, and the aluminum
rod is attached to a wall as shown in the diagram. The rods are initially unstressed
and then a 20, 000 lb horizontal force is applied to the end of the brass rod as
shown. Additionally, the rods experience a temperature increase of 80 o F.
Determine the final stress that develops in each rod, and the total movement of
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Stress/strsp383.htm (1 of 4)6/28/2005 2:09:06 PM
point C. (Al. stress = 10,000 psi.; Br. stress = 20,000 psi.; Total def. = .384")
3. A steel rod and a brass rod are attached to each other and mounted between
two walls as shown in the diagram. If the structure is initially unstressed and then
experiences a temperature increase of 80o F., determine the stress which develops
both in the steel and in the brass rod, and the amount of deformation of the brass
rod. ( St. stress = 8000 psi.; Br. stress = 16000 psi.; Def. of Br.=.0182")
4. A horizontal bar ABDF is pinned to the wall at point A, and supported by steel
member BC and aluminum member DE, as shown in the diagram. If the structure
is initially unstressed and then experiences a temperature decrease of 70o F.,
determine the stress which develops in the steel and aluminum members, and the
movement of point F.(St.stress =9444 psi.; Al stress = 2951 psi.; Move. of F =
-.074")
Select:
Topic 3. Stress, Strain & Hooke's - Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
= 11 x 10-6/oF
Young's Modulus:
ESteel = 30 x 10 6 lb/in2; EAluminum = 10 x 10
lb/in2; EConcrete = 5 x 10
lb/in2; EBrass = 15 x 10
lb/in2
1. In the structure shown member ABCD is pinned to the wall at point A, and
supported by a brass member, BE, and by a steel member, CF. Both BE and CF
have cross sectional areas of .5 in2. The structure is initially unstressed and then
experiences a temperature increase of 50 degrees Celsius.
For this structure:
A. Draw a Free Body Diagram showing all support forces and loads.
B. Determine the axial stress that develops in brass member BE.
C. Determine the resulting movement of point D.
(Select Solution Problem 1 for solution)
2. In the structure shown the L-shaped member BCD is supported by Steel rod AB
and Aluminum member DE, and pinned at point C, as shown. Member DE has a
cross sectional area of 1 in2 and member AB has a cross sectional area of .5 in2.
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Stress/strsx3844.htm (1 of 2)6/28/2005 2:09:13 PM
of 60 degrees Celsius.
A. Draw a Free Body Diagram showing all support forces and loads
B. Determine the axial stress that develops in steel rod AB.
C. Determine the resulting movement of point D.
(Select Solution Problem 2 for solution)
or Select:
Topic 3. Stress, Strain & Hooke's - Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
STRENGTH OF MATERIALS
Strength Welcome
Details - Syllabus
Email Instructor
Student Grades
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Topic 1: Statics I - Principals
Topic 4: Beams I
Topic 5: Beams II
Reference: Search
Top Of Page
2.2 Trusses
Trusses - Example 1
Trusses - Example 2
Trusses - Example 3
Additional Examples: #5, #6, #7, #8, #9, #10 [Previous test problems]
Problem Assignment - Trusses 1 (Required)
Problem Assignment - Trusses 2 (Supplemental)
Problem Assignment - Trusses 3 (Supplemental)
2.3 Statics II - Sample Exam
Topic 4: Beams I
4.1 Shear Forces and Bending Moments I
4.2 Shear Forces and Bending Moments II
Additional examples: (cantilever) #4, #5, #6, #7, #8, #9 [Previous test problems]
4.4a1 Shear Force/Bending Moment Problems - Simply Supported Beams 1
[supplementary]
except#5]
5.6d Beams - Problem Assignment 4 - Bending & Shear Stress [required, except #5]
7.6c Columns & Buckling - Topic Examination (with thin wall pressure vessel problem)
Topic 4: Beams I
4.1 Shear Forces and Bending Moments I
4.2 Shear Forces and Bending Moments II
4.3 Shear Forces and Bending Moments Examples
4.3a Simply Supported Beam - Example 1
4.3b Simply Supported Beam - Example 2
4.3c Cantilever Beam - Example 3
Additional examples: (simply supported) #4, #5, #6, #7, #8, #9
[Previous test problems]
Beams 1 [supplementary]
Beams 2 [required]
1 [supplementary]
2 [required, except#5]
with a load of 10,000 lb. acting downward right at the center of the beam. Due to
symmetry the two support forces will be equal, with a value of 5000 lb. each. This
is the static equilibrium condition for the whole beam.
Next let's examine a section of the beam. We will cut the beam a arbitrary
distance (x) between 0 and 10 feet, and apply static equilibrium conditions to the
left end section as shown in Diagram 2.. We can do this since as the entire beam
is in static equilibrium, then a section of the beam must also be in equilibrium.
In Diagram 2a, we have shown left section of the beam, x feet, long - where x is
an arbitrary distance greater than 0 ft. and less than 10 ft. Notice if we just
include the 5000 lb. external support force, the section of the beam is clearly not
in equilibrium. Neither the sum of forces (translational equilibrium), nor the sum
of torque (rotational equilibrium) will sum to zero - as required for equilibrium.
Therefore, since we know the beam section is in equilibrium, there must be
some forces and/or torque not accounted for.
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Beams/beam41.htm (2 of 5)6/28/2005 2:10:42 PM
In diagram 2b, we have shown the missing force and torque. The 10,000 lb. load
which we originally applied to the beam, and the support force cause internal
"shearing forces" and internal torque called "bending moments" to develop. (We
have symbolically shown these in Diagram 2c.) When we cut the beam, the
internal shear force and bending moment at that point then become an external
force and moment (torque) acting on the section. We have shown these in
Diagram 2b, and labeled them V (shear force) and M (bending moment).
Please note that M is a moment or torque - not a force. It does not appear in the
sum of forces equation when we apply static equilibrium to the section - which will
be our next step.
Equilibrium Conditions:
V from the force equation into the torque equation: - 5000 lb. * x + M = 0 , then
These are the equations for the shear force and bending moments for the section
of the beam from 0 to 10 feet. Notice that the internal shear force is a constant
value of 5000 lb. for the section, but that the value of the internal torque (bending
moment) varies from 0 ft-lb. at x = 0, to a value of 50,000 ft-lb. at x = 10 ft.
[We really should not put exactly 0 ft., and 10 ft. into our equation for the bending moment. The
reason is that at 0 and 10 ft., there are 'point loads/forces' acting. That is, we have our forces
acting at point - and a point has zero area, so the stress (F/A) at these points would in theory be
infinite. Of course, a stress can not be infinite, and we can not apply a force at a point - it is
actually applied over some area (even if the area if small). However, in 'book' problems we
normally apply forces at a point. To deal with this difficulty, we actually skip around these
points. We cut our section at 0' < x < 6'. Still when we put values into our expressions we put in
values such as x = 9.99999999 ft, and round it off (numerically) to 10 ft. This is, in effect,
cheating a bit. We are putting in the value x = 10 ft., but only because the number we actually
put in was rounded off to 10 ft. It all may sound confusing, but it works, and will become clear
as we do several examples.]
First, however we will finish analyzing our simple beam. So far we have found
expressions for the shear force and bending moments (V1 = 5000 lb, M1 =
5000x ft-lb) for section 1 of the beam, between 0 and 10 ft. Now we will look at
the next section of the beam. We cut the beam at distance x (ft) from the left end,
where x is now greater than 10 ft. and less then 20 ft. and then look at entire
section to the left of where we cut the beam (See Diagram 3). Where the beam
was cut, we have an internal shear force and bending moment - which now
become external. These are shown in Diagram 3 as V2 and M2. (We add the '2', to
indicate we are looking at section two of the beam.)
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Beams/beam41.htm (3 of 5)6/28/2005 2:10:42 PM
We next apply static equilibrium conditions to the beam section, and obtain:
Equilibrium Conditions:
5000 lb.
These are a quite useful way of visualizing how the shear force and bending
moments vary through out the beam. We have completed our first Shear Force/
Bending Moment Problem. We have determined the expressions for the shear
forces and bending moments in the beam, and have made accompanying shear
force and bending moment diagrams.
Now that we have the general concepts concerning shear forces and bending
moments, we want to step back for a moment and become a little more specific
concerning some details, such as choosing the direction of the shear forces and
bending moments.
Continue to:
Topic 4.2: Beams - Shear Force and Bending Moments II
or Select:
Topic 4: Beams - Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
Notice that there is a possibility for a degree of confusion with sign notation. When
summing forces, the direction of V shown in the diagram is in the negative ydirection, yet it is a positive shear force. This can lead to some confusion unless
we are careful. We will deal with possible confusion by always working from the
left for our beam sections, and always choosing V & M in a positive direction
according to the shear force and bending moments conventions defined above.
That is, we will always select the V & M directions as shown in Diagram 1. This
approach will simplify the sign conventions, as we will see in the next example.
However before the next example, we will look at the causes of the internal
bending moment in a little greater detail.
In Diagram 2a, we have shown a simply supported loaded beam, and have
indicated in an exaggerated way the bending caused by the load. If we then cut
the beam and look at a left end section, we have the Diagram 2b.
In this diagram we have, for the sake of clarity, left out the vertical shear force
which develops, but have shown horizontal forces (-Fx and + Fx). These forces
develop since, as the beam bends, the top region of the beam is put into
compression and the bottom region of the beam is put into tension. As a result
there are internal horizontal (x-direction) forces acting in the beam; however for
every positive x-force, there is an equal and opposite negative x-force. Thus the
net horizontal (x-direction) internal force in the beam section is zero.
However, even though the actual x-forces cancel each other, the torque
produced by these x-forces is not zero. Looking at Diagram 2c and mentally
summing torque about the center of the beam, we see that the horizontal x-forces
cause a net toque - which we call the internal bending moment, M. This is the
cause of the internal bending moment (torque) inside a loaded beam.
We now continue by proceeding very slowly and carefully through a somewhat
extended example(s). We will also examine an alternate method for determining
the bending moments in a beam.
Please select: Example 1 ; Example 2 ; Example 3
Or:
Topic 4: Beams - Table of Contents
Statics & Srength of Materials Home Page
A loaded, simply supported beam is shown. For this beam we would like to determine
expressions for the internal shear forces and bending moments in each section of the
beam, and to make shear force and bending moment diagrams for the beam.
We will work very slowly and carefully, step by step, through the solution for this
example.
Solution: Part A. We first find the support forces acting on the structure. We do this in
the normal way, by applying static equilibrium conditions for the beam.
STEP 1: Draw a free body diagram showing and labeling all load forces and support
(reaction) forces, as well as any needed angles and dimensions.
STEP 2: Break any forces not already in x and y direction into their x and y components.
Sum TB = (Dy)(8 ft) - (6,000 lb.)(4 ft) + (1,000 lb./ft)(8 ft)(4 ft) + (4,000 lb.)
(8 ft) = 0
Solving for the unknowns: By =23,000 lb.; Dy = -5,000 lb. (The negative sign
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Beams/beame43a.htm (1 of 9)6/28/2005 2:11:08 PM
Section 1: Cut the beam at x, where 0 < x < 8 ft., and analyze left hand section.
1. Draw a FBD of the beam section shown and labeling all forces and toque acting -
including the shear force and bending moment (which act as an external force and
torque at the point where we cut the beam.) (See Diagram - Section 1) Notice we have
drawn the shear force and bending moment in their positive directions according to the
defined sign convention discussed earlier, and have labeled them as V1 and M1, as this
1,000x] lb.
This expression gives us the values of the internal shear force in the beam between 0
and 8 ft. Notice as x nears zero, the shear force value in the beam goes to - 4000 lb.,
and as x approaches 8 ft., the shear force value becomes -12,000 lb., and that is
negative everywhere between 0 and 8 ft. Let's think for a moment what this negative
sign tells us. Since we found the shear force (V) by static equilibrium conditions, the
negative sign tells us that we choose the incorrect direction for the shear force - that the
shear force acts in the opposite direction. However, we choose the positive direction of
the shear force (by its definition) and so the negative sign also tells us we have a
negative shear force.
To try to simplify a somewhat confusing sign situation we may say this: As long
as we work from the left end of the beam, and choose the initial direction of the
shear force and bending moment in the positive direction (by their definition),
then when we solve for the shear force and bending moment, the sign which
results is the correct sign as applies to the shear force and bending moment
values.
If we graph the shear force expression above, we obtain the graph shown of the internal
shearing force in the beam for the first eight feet. We next will determine the bending
moment expression for this first beam section.
4. We can find the bending moment from static equilibrium principles; summing torque
about the left end of the beam.
Referring to the free body diagram for beam section 1, we can write:
Sum Torque left end = -1000 lb/ft * (x) * (x/2) - V1 (x) + M1 = 0
To make sure we understand this equation, let's examine each term. The first term is the
torque due to the uniformly distributed load - 1000 lb./ft * (x) ft (this is the load) times
(x/2) which is the perpendicular distance, since the uniform load may be considered to
act in the center, which is x/2 from the left end. Then we have the shear force V1 times
x feet to the left end, and finally we have the bending moment M1 (which needs no
distance since it is already a torque).
Next we substitute the expression for V1 (V1 = [-4,000 - 1,000x] lb.) from our sum of
forces result above into the torque equation to get:
Sum Torque left end = -1000 lb/ft * (x) * (x/2) -[-4,000 - 1,000x] (x) + M1 = 0 ;
and solving for M1 = [-500x2 - 4,000x] ft-lb.
This is our expression for the internal torque inside the load beam for section 1, the first
eight feet, which is graphed in the diagram below.
5. Finally, we may also obtain the expression for the bending moment by integration of
the shear force expression. The integrals we will be using are basic types.
Section 2: We cut the beam at x, where 8 < x <12 ft., and analyze the entire section
left of where we cut the beam.
1. Draw a FBD of the beam section shown and labeling all forces and toque acting including the shear force and bending moment (which act as an external force and
torque at the point where we cut the beam.) (See Diagram - Section 2) Notice we have
drawn the shear force and bending moment in their positive directions according to the
defined sign convention discussed earlier, and have labeled them as V2 and M2, as this
is section 2 of the beam.
Sum Fy = -4,000 lb. - 1,000 lb./ft(8 ft) + 23,000 lb. - V2 = 0, Solving: V2 = 11,000 lb.
conditions, or by integration. Once more we will do it both ways for this section.
Rotational Equilibrium:
Sum of Toque left end = - (1000 lb./ft * 8 ft) * 4 ft. + 23,000 lb. * 8 ft. - V2 * x +
M2 = 0; then we substitute the value for V2 (V2 = 11,000 lb) from above and obtain:
- (1000 lb./ft * 8 ft) * 4 ft. + 23,000 lb. * 8 ft. - (11,000 lb.) * x + M2 = 0; and
then solving for M2 we find: M2 = [11,000x - 152,000] ft-lb.
, or M2 = 11,000x + C2
We get our boundary condition from another characteristic of the bending moment
expression - which is that the bending moment must be continuous. That is, the value of
the bending moment at the end of the first beam section, and the value of the bending
moment at the beginning of the second beam section must agree - they must be equal.
We determine the value of the bending moment from our M1 equation as x approaches 8
Then our boundary condition to find C2 is: at x=8 ft M=-64,000 ft-lb. We apply our
Apply BC: -64,000 ft-lb. = 11,000 lb. (8) + C2, Solving: C2 = -152,000 ft-lb.
Sum Fx = 0 (no net external x- forces)Sum Fy = -4,000 lb. - 1,000 lb./ft(8 ft) + 23,000
V3 = 5,000 lb.
4. We may determine the bending moment expression by applying rotational equilibrium
conditions, or by integration. Once more we will do it both ways for this section.
Rotational Equilibrium:
Sum of Toque left end = - (1000 lb./ft * 8 ft) * 4 ft. + 23,000 lb. * 8 ft. - 6,000 lb.
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Beams/beame43a.htm (7 of 9)6/28/2005 2:11:08 PM
* 12 ft -V3 * x + M3 = 0; then we substitute the value for V3 (V3 = 5,000 lb) from
above and obtain:
- (1000 lb./ft * 8 ft) * 4 ft. + 23,000 lb. * 8 ft. - 6,000 lb. * 12 ft - (5,000 lb.) *
x + M3 = 0; and then solving for M3 we find: M3 = [5,000x - 80,000] ft-lb.
We will find the bending moment expression for this section using integration only.
Integration
, or M3 = 5,000x + C3
Return to:
Topic 4.2: Shear Forces and Bending Moments II
or Select:
Topic 4: Beams - Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
Solution: We first need to determine the external support reaction by applying our
standard static equilibrium conditions and procedure..
PART A
STEP 1: Draw a free body diagram showing and labeling all load forces and support
(reaction) forces, as well as any needed angles and dimensions.
STEP 2: Resolve any forces not already in x and y direction into their x and y
components.
4. We can find the bending moment from static equilibrium principles; summing torque
about the left end of the beam. Referring to the free body diagram for beam section 1,
we can write:
, solving M1 = -400x2 +
4,300x + C1
Applying the boundary condition: 0 = -400(0)2 + 4,300(0) + C1, and solving gives
us: C1 = 0.
Therefore the bending moment expression for section 1 of the beam is:
(The shear force and bending moment diagrams are shown at the bottom of this
example page.)
Section 2: We continue in the same manner with beam section 2. We note that the
loading changes once more at 12 ft, due to the upward support force acting at that
point. So for beam section 2, we cut the beam at location x, where 8 < x <12 ft., and
then analyze left hand beam section from x to the end of the beam.
1. Draw a FBD of the beam section showing and labeling all forces and toque acting including the shear force and bending moment (which act as an external force and
torque at the point where we cut the beam.) We have labeled them as V2 and M2, as
this is section 2 of the beam.
Sum Fy = 4,300 lbs - 800 lbs/ft*(8 ft) - 1,200lbs/ft *(x - 8)ft - V2 = 0; and
We next substitute the value for V2 (V2 = [7,500 - 1,200x] lb.) from above and
obtain:
- (800 lb./ft * 8 ft) * 4 ft. -1200 * (x - 8')*[(x-8')/2+8'] - [7,500 - 1,200x]* x
+ M2 = 0;
Next we find the bending moment, M2, from integration of shear force expression,V2.
Integration:
7,500x + C2
We obtain our boundary condition for beam section 2 by remembering that the bending
moment must be continuous along the beam. This means that value of the bending
moment at the end of section 1 (at x = 8 ft.) must also be the value of the bending
moment at the beginning of section 2 (at x = 8 ft.). Thus our boundary condition to find
C2 is: at x = 8 ft M = 8,560 ft-lbs (from equation M1). Now applying the boundary
condition and solving for the integration constant, C2, we have:
8560 ft-lbs = -600(8)2 +7500(8) + C2, and solving: C2 = -13,000 ft-lbs
Therefore our bending moment expression is:
M2 = [-600x2 + 7,500x - 12,800] ft-lbs for 8 < x < 12
(The shear force and bending moment diagrams are shown at the bottom of this
example page.)
Section 3: Finally, we continue with the last section of the beam, cutting the beam at
location x, where 12 < x < 16 ft., and analyzing the left hand beam section from x to the
left end of the beams.
1. Draw a FBD of the beam section showing and labeling all forces and toque acting including the shear force and bending moment (which act as an external force and
torque at the point where we cut the beam.) We have labeled them as V3 and M3, as
this is section 3 of the beam.
Sum Fy = 4,300 lbs - 800 lbs/ft(8 ft) + 11,700 lbs - 1,200lbs/ft (x - 8)ft - V3 =
Once again the distance from end A at which the effective load due to the uniform load
of 1200 lb/ft [1200 lb/ft * (x-8')]may be considered to act must be determined
carefully. That distance [(x-8')/2 + 8')] is shown at the top of the adjacent diagram.
We next substitute the value for V3 (V3 = [-1,200x + 19,200] lb.) from above and
obtain:
- (800 lb./ft * 8 ft) * 4 ft. - 1200 lb. *(x- 8 ft.)*[(x-8')/2 +8'] + 11,700 lb. * 12
ft - [-1,200x + 19,200] lb* x + M3 = 0; and then solving for M3 we find: M3 = [
600x2 + 19,200x - 153,000] ft-lbs for 12 < x < 16.
Determine the bending moment by Integration:
Return to:
Topic 4.2: Shear Forces and Bending Moments II
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Beams/beame43b.htm (7 of 8)6/28/2005 2:11:31 PM
or Select:
Topic 4: Beams - Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
Solution:
Part A: Our first step will be to determine the support reactions and external torque
acting on the loaded beam. For a cantilevered beam (with one end embedded or
rigidly fixed at the wall), the wall may exert horizontal and vertical forces and an
external torque (which we will call an external moment, and label Mext) acting on
the beam - as we have shown in the free body diagram of the beam.
STEP 1: Draw a free body diagram showing and labeling all load forces and support
(reaction) forces, as well as any needed angles and dimensions.
STEP 2: Break any forces not already in x and y direction into their x and y
components.
STEP 3: Apply the static equilibrium conditions.
Sum Fx = Ax = 0
Sum Fy = -4,000 lbs - 3,000 lbs - (2,000 lbs/ft)(6 ft) - 2,000 lbs + Ay = 0
Sum TA = (-4,000 lbs)(4 ft) - (3,000 lbs)(8 ft) -(2,000 lbs/ft)(6 ft)(11 ft) (2,000 lbs)(14 ft) +Mext = 0
Solving for the unknowns: Ay = 21,000 lbs; Mext = 200,000 ft-lbs
Part B: Determine the Shear Force and Bending Moment expressions for each
section of the loaded beam. For this process we will cut the beam into sections,
and then use static equilibrium condition - sum of forces to determine the shear
force expressions, and Integration to determine the bending moment expressions in
each section of the beam.
Section 1: Cut the beam at an arbitrary location x, where 0 < x < 4 ft. (since at 4
ft. the beam loading changes.), and analyze left hand beam section, from x to the
left end of the beam.
1. Draw a FBD of the beam section showing and labeling all forces and toque acting
- including the shear force and bending moment (which act as an external force and
torque at the point where we cut the beam.) (See Diagram - Section 1) Notice we
have drawn the shear force and bending moment in their positive directions
according to the defined sign convention for the shear force and bending moment
discussed earlier, and have labeled them as V1 and M1, as this is section 1 of the
beam.
4. We now find the bending moment expression by summing torque about the left
when we substitute in the value for V1 = 21,000 lb. we obtain the equation:
[This is the same result we will find by integration. In general, particularly for non-
Now we find the bending moment equation by integration of the shear force
expression.
Integration
The boundary condition, which we will use to determine the integration constant C1,
is different for the cantilevered end of a beam as compared with the end of a simply
supported beam (or a free end). Since we have an external moment acting at the
end of the cantilevered beam, the value of the bending moment must become
equal to the negative of the external moment at the cantilevered end of the
beam, in order for the beam to be in rotational equilibrium (sum of torque =
0). Thus our boundary condition to determine C1 is: at x = 0, M = -200,000 ft-lb
(That is, for a cantilever beam, the value of the bending moment at the wall is
equal to the negative of the external moment.)
Applying the boundary condition and solving for the integration constant:
-200,000 = 21000(0) + C1; and so C1 = -200,000
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Beams/beame43c.htm (3 of 7)6/28/2005 2:11:40 PM
Then the bending moment expression is: M1 = [21,000x - 200,000] ft-lb for 0 <
x < 4 ft.
Section 2: Since the loading changes at 8 ft, due to the point load and the
beginning of the uniformly distributed load, for section 2 we cut the beam at
location x, where 4 < x < 8 ft.; and analyze the left hand beam section.
1. Draw a FBD of the beam section showing and labeling all forces and toque acting
- including the shear force and bending moment (which act as an external force and
torque at the point where we cut the beam.) We label them as V2 and M2, as this is
section 2 of the beam.
4. We now find the bending moment expression by summing torque about the left
Sum of Torque left end = -4000 lb.* 4 ft. -V2 * x + 200,000 ft-lb + M2 = 0;
when we substitute in the value for V2 = 17,000 lb. we obtain the equation:
Sum of Torque left end = -4000 lb.* 4 ft. -17,000 lb. * x + 200,000 ft-lb +
M2 = 0
And solving for M2 = [ 17,000x - 184,000] ft-lb for 4 < x < 8 ft.
Next we also determine the bending moment expression by integration of the shear
force equation from above.
Integration:
, and so M2 = 17,000x + C2
We obtain our boundary condition for beam section 2 by remembering that the
bending moment must be continuous along the beam. This means that value of the
bending moment at the end of section 1 (at x = 4 ft.) must also be the value of the
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Beams/beame43c.htm (4 of 7)6/28/2005 2:11:40 PM
bending moment at the beginning of section 2 (at x = 4 ft.). Thus our boundary
Now applying the boundary condition and solving for the integration constant, C2,
we have:
Section 3: Cut the beam at x, where 8 < x < 14 ft. and analyze left hand beam
1. Draw a FBD of the beam section showing and labeling all forces and toque acting
- including the shear force and bending moment (which act as an external force and
torque at the point where we cut the beam.) We label them as V3 and M3, as this is
section 3 of the beam.
4. We now find the bending moment expression by summing torque about the left
Sum of Torque left end = -4000 lb.* 4 ft. -3000 lb.* 8 ft. - 2000 lb/ft *(x-8')
*[(x-8)/2 + 8'] -V3 * x + 200,000 ft-lb + M3 = 0; [ If you are unsure how the
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Beams/beame43c.htm (5 of 7)6/28/2005 2:11:40 PM
third term in the equation was obtained, please see example 2.}
When we substitute in the value for V3 = [-2,000x + 30,000] lb. we obtain the
equation:
Sum of Torque= -4000 lb.* 4 ft. -3000 lb.* 8 ft. - 2000 lb/ft *(x-8')*[(x
8)/2 + 8'] - [-2,000x + 30,000] lb* x + 200,000 ft-lb + M2 = 0
And solving for M3 = [-1,000x2+30,000x - 224,000] ft-lb.
By Integration:
30,000x + C3
Since the right hand end of the beam is a free end, the bending moment must go to
zero as x goes approaches 14 ft. So our boundary condition to find the integration
constant, C3, is: at x = 14 ft M = 0 ft-lb
Applying the boundary condition: 0 = -1,000(14)2 + 30,000(14) + C3 , and
solving C3 = -224,000 ft-lbs
So M3 = [-1,000x2 +30,000x - 224,000] ft-lbs for 8 < x < 14 ft.
Part C: Shear Force and Bending Moment Diagrams: Now using the expressions
found in Part B above, we can draw the shear force and bending moment diagrams
for our loaded beam.
V1 = 21,000 lb., V2 = 17,000 lb., V3 = [-2,000x+30,000] lb.
Return to:
Topic 4.2: Shear Forces and Bending Moments II
or Select:
Topic 4: Beams - Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
Solution311
Unless otherwise indicated, all joints and support points are assumed to be pinned or
hinged joints.
Solution:
Part A:
STEP 1: Draw a free body diagram
showing and labeling all load forces
and support (reaction) forces, as
well as any needed angles and
dimensions.
STEP 2: Break any forces not
already in x and y direction into their
x and y components.
STEP 3: Apply the equilibrium
conditions.
Sum Fy = (-2,000 lbs/ft)(4 ft) - (1,000 lbs/ft)(6 ft) + Ay + Cy = 0
Sum TA = (Cy)(10 ft) - (2,000 lbs/ft)(4 ft)(2 ft) - (1,000 lbs/ft)(6 ft)(13 ft) = 0
Solving for the unknowns:
C = 9,400 lbs; A = 4,600 lbs
y
Part B: Determine the Shear Forces and Bending Moments expressions for each section
of the loaded beam. For this process we will cut the beam into sections, and then use
Solution311
Statics - Sum of Forces to determine the Shear Force expressions, and Integration to
determine the Bending Moment expressions in each section of the beam.
Section 1: Cut the beam at x, where 0 < x < 4 ft.
1. FBD. (Shown in Diagram)
2. All forces in x & y components (yes)
3. Apply translational equilibrium conditions (forces only):
Sum Fx = 0 (no net external x- forces)
Sum Fy = 4,600 lb - 2,000 lb/ft *x - V1 = 0
Solving: V1 = (4,600 - 2,000x) lbs
4. Integration
2
M1 = -1000 x + 4600x + C1
a)Boundary condition to find C1: at x = 0; M = 0
Apply BC: 0 = -1000(0)2 + 4600(0) + C1, Solving: C1 = 0
2
Solution311
M3 = -500x + 16,000x + C3
a)Boundary condition to find C3: at x=16 ft M=0 ft-lbs (end of beam, no external torque
so M3=0)
Apply BC: 0 = -500(16)2 + 16,000(16) + C3
Solving: C3 = -128,000 ft-lbs
2
Part C: Shear Force and Bending Moment Diagrams: Now using the expressions found in
Part B above, we can draw the shear force and bending moment diagrams for our loaded
beam.
V1 = 4,600-2,000x lb, V2 = -3,400 lb, V3 = -1,000x+16,000 lb
2
Solution311
solution312
Solution:
Part A: Statics
STEP 1: Draw a free body
diagram showing and labeling
all load forces and support
(reaction) forces, as well as
any needed angles and
dimensions.
STEP 2: Break any forces not
already in x and y direction
into their x and y components.
STEP 3: Apply the equilibrium
conditions.
SFx = 0
solution312
of the loaded beam. For this process we will cut the beam into sections, and then use
Statics - Sum of Forces to determine the Shear Force expressions, and Integration to
determine the Bending Moment expressions in each section of the beam.
Section 1: Cut the beam at x, where (0 <
x < 10) ft.
1. FBD. (Shown in Diagram)
2. All forces in x & y components (yes)
3. Apply translational equilibrium
conditions (forces only):
SFx = 0 (no net external x- forces)
solution312
M2 = 6,000x + C2
Boundary condition from Section 1 at (x = 14 ft) ; M = 0. (end of simply supported
beam):
Apply BC: 0 = 6,000(14 ft) + C2
Solving: C2 = -84,000 ft-lbs
Part C: Shear Force and Bending Moment Diagrams: Now using the expressions found
in Part B above, we can draw the shear force and bending moment diagrams for our
loaded beam.
V1 = [-50x2 - 735] lbs, V2 = +6,000 lbs
Solution313
Unless otherwise indicated, all joints and support points are assumed to be
Solution:
Part A:
STEP 1: Draw a free body diagram
showing and labeling all load forces
and support (reaction) forces, as well
as any needed angles and dimensions.
STEP 2: Break any forces not already
in x and y direction into their x and y
components.
STEP 3: Apply the equilibrium
conditions.
Sum Fy = (-1,000 lbs/ft)(4 ft) - (1,500 lbs/ft)(4 ft) + By + Cy = 0
Sum TB = (Cy)(6 ft) + (1,000 lbs/ft)(4 ft)(2 ft) - (1,500 lbs/ft)(4 ft)(8 ft) = 0
Solving for the unknowns:
C = 6,670 lbs; B = 3,330 lbs
y
Part B: Determine the Shear Forces and Bending Moments expressions for each
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Stests/beams1/sol313.htm (1 of 4)6/28/2005 2:12:01 PM
Solution313
section of the loaded beam. For this process we will cut the beam into sections,
and then use Statics - Sum of Forces to determine the Shear Force expressions,
M1 = -500 x + C1
a)Boundary condition to find C1: at x=0 M=0
Apply BC: 0 = -500(0)2 + C1
Solving: C1 = 0
2
Solution313
4. Integration
M2 = -667x + C2
a)Boundary condition to find C2: at x=4 ft M=-8000 ft-lbs (from equation M1)
Apply BC: 8000 ft-lbs = -667(4) + C2
Solving: C2 = -5,330 ft-lbs
Therefore M2 = [-667x - 5,330] ft-lbs for 4 < x < 10
Section 3: Cut the beam at x, where 10
< x < 14 ft. Analyze left hand section.
1. FBD. (Shown in Diagram)
2. All forces in x & y components (yes)
3. Apply translational equilibrium
conditions (forces only):
Sum Fx = 0 (no net external x- forces)
Sum Fy = -1,000 lbs/ft(4 ft) + 3,330 lbs
+ 6,670 lbs -1500lbs/ft(x-10)ft - V3 = 0
Solving: V3 = [-1,500x + 21,000] lbs
4. Integration
2
M3 = -750x + 21,000x + C3
a)Boundary condition to find C3: at x=14 ft M=0 ft-lbs (end of beam, no external
torque so M3=0)
Apply BC: 0 = -750(14)2 + 21,000(14) + C3
Solving: C3 = -147,000 ft-lbs
2
Solution313
Solution314
Unless otherwise indicated, all joints and support points are assumed to be pinned
or hinged joints.
Solution:
Part A:
STEP 1: Draw a free body
diagram showing and labeling
all load forces and support
(reaction) forces, as well as
any needed angles and
dimensions.
STEP 2: Break any forces not
already in x and y direction into
their x and y components.
STEP 3: Apply the equilibrium
conditions.
Sum Fy = (-5,000 lbs) - (1,000 lbs/ft)(8 ft) + Ay + Cy = 0
Sum TA = (Cy)(8 ft) - (5,000 lbs)(4 ft) - (1,000 lbs/ft)(8 ft)(12 ft) = 0
Solving for the unknowns:
C = 14,500 lbs; A = -1,500 lbs
y
Part B: Determine the Shear Forces and Bending Moments expressions for each
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Stests/beams1/sol314.htm (1 of 4)6/28/2005 2:12:09 PM
Solution314
section of the loaded beam. For this process we will cut the beam into sections, and
then use Statics - Sum of Forces to determine the Shear Force expressions, and
Integration to determine the Bending Moment expressions in each section of the beam.
Section 1: Cut the beam at x, where 0 < x < 4 ft. Analyze left
hand section.
1. FBD. (Shown in Diagram)
2. All forces in x & y components (yes)
3. Apply translational equilibrium conditions (forces only):
Sum Fx = 0 (no net external x- forces)
Sum Fy = -1,500 lbs - V1 = 0
Solving: V1 = -1,500 lbs
4. Integration
M1 = -1,500x + C1
a)Boundary condition to find C1: at x=0 M=0
Apply BC: 0 = -1,500(0) + C1
Solving: C1 = 0
Solution314
a)Boundary condition to find C2: at x=4 ft M=-8,000 ft-lbs (from equation M1)
Apply BC: 8000 ft-lbs = -6,500(4) + C2
Solving: C2 = 20,000 ft-lbs
Therefore M2 = [-6,500x + 20,000] ft-lbs for 4 < x < 8
Section 3: Cut the beam at x, where 8 <
x < 16 ft. Analyze left hand section.
1. FBD. (Shown in Diagram)
2. All forces in x & y components (yes)
3. Apply translational equilibrium
conditions (forces only):
Sum Fx = 0 (no net external x- forces)
Sum Fy = -1,500 lbs - 5,000 lbs + 14,500
lbs -1,000lbs/ft(x-8)ft - V3 = 0
Solving: V3 = [-1,000x + 16,000] lbs
4. Integration
2
M3 = -500x + 16,000x + C3
a)Boundary condition to find C3: at x=16 ft M=0 ft-lbs (end of beam, no external
torque so M3=0)
Apply BC: 0 = -500(16)2 + 16,000(16) + C3
Solving: C3 = -128,000 ft-lbs
2
Part C: Shear Force and Bending Moment Diagrams: Now using the expressions found
in Part B above, we can draw the shear force and bending moment diagrams for our
loaded beam.
V1 = -1,500 lb, V2 = -6,500 lb, V3 = -1,000x+16,000 lb
2
Solution314
Solution315
Unless otherwise indicated, all joints and support points are assumed to be pinned
or hinged joints.
Solution:
STEP 1: Draw a free body
diagram showing and labeling all
load forces and support
(reaction) forces, as well as any
needed angles and dimensions.
STEP 2: Break any forces not
already in x and y direction into
their x and y components.
STEP 3: Apply the equilibrium
conditions.
Sum Fy = (-800 lbs/ft)(8 ft) - (1,200 lbs/ft)(8 ft) + Ay + Cy = 0
Sum TA = (Cy)(12 ft) - (800 lbs/ft)(8 ft)(4 ft) - (1,200 lbs/ft)(8 ft)(12 ft) = 0
Solving for the unknowns:
C = 11,700 lbs; A = 4,300 lbs
y
Solution315
Part B: Determine the Shear Forces and Bending Moments expressions for each
section of the loaded beam. For this process we will cut the beam into sections, and
then use Statics - Sum of Forces to determine the Shear Force expressions, and
Integration to determine the Bending Moment expressions in each section of the
beam.
Section 1: Cut the beam at x, where 0 < x < 8 ft.
Analyze left hand section.
1. FBD. (Shown in Diagram)
2. All forces in x & y components (yes)
3. Apply translational equilibrium conditions (forces
only):
Sum Fx = 0 (no net external x- forces)
M1 = -400x + 4,270x + C1
a)Boundary condition to find C1: at x=0 M=0
Apply BC: 0 = -400(0)2 + 4,270(0) + C1
Solving: C1 = 0
Solution315
M2 = -600x + 7,470x + C2
a)Boundary condition to find C2: at x=8 ft M=-8,560 ft-lbs (from equation M1)
Apply BC: -8560 ft-lbs = -600(8)2 +7470(8) + C2
Solving: C2 = -128,000 ft-lbs
2
M3 = -600x + 19,200x + C3
a)Boundary condition to find C3: at x=16 ft M=0 ft-lbs (end of beam, no external
torque so M3=0)
Apply BC: 0 = -600(16)2 + 19,200(16) + C3
Solving: C3 = -153,000 ft-lbs
2
Solution315
Solution316
Unless otherwise indicated, all joints and support points are assumed to be pinned
or hinged joints.
Solution:
Part A:
STEP 1: Draw a free body
diagram showing and labeling all
load forces and support
(reaction) forces, as well as any
needed angles and dimensions.
STEP 2: Break any forces not
already in x and y direction into
their x and y components.
STEP 3: Apply the equilibrium
conditions.
Sum Fy = -4,000 lbs - (1,000 lbs/ft)(8 ft) - 6,000 lbs + By + Dy = 0
Sum TB = (Dy)(8 ft) - (6,000 lbs)(4 ft) + (1,000 lbs/ft)(8 ft)(4 ft) + (4,000 lbs)(8 ft)
=0
Solving for the unknowns:
B =23,000 lbs; D = -5,000 lbs
y
Solution316
Part B: Determine the Shear Forces and Bending Moments expressions for each
section of the loaded beam. For this process we will cut the beam into sections, and
then use Statics - Sum of Forces to determine the Shear Force expressions, and
Integration to determine the Bending Moment expressions in each section of the
beam.
Section 1: Cut the beam at x, where 0 < x < 8 ft.
Analyze left hand section.
1. FBD. (Shown in Diagram)
2. All forces in x & y components (yes)
3. Apply translational equilibrium conditions (forces
only):
Sum Fx = 0 (no net external x- forces)
M1 = -500x - 4,000x + C1
a)Boundary condition to find C1: at x=0 M=0
Apply BC: 0 = -500(0)2 - 4,000(0) + C1
Solving: C1 = 0
2
Solution316
M2 = 11,000x + C2
a)Boundary condition to find C2: at x=8 ft M=-64,000 ft-lbs (from equation M1)
Apply BC: -64,000 ft-lbs = 11,000 lbs (8) + C2
Solving: C2 = -152,000 ft-lbs
Therefore M2 = [11,000x - 152,000] ft-lbs for 8 < x < 12
Section 3: Cut the beam at x, where
12 < x < 16 ft. Analyze left hand
section.
1. FBD. (Shown in Diagram)
2. All forces in x & y components (yes)
3. Apply translational equilibrium
conditions (forces only):
Sum Fx = 0 (no net external x- forces)
Sum Fy = -4,000 lbs - 1,000 lbs/ft(8 ft)
+ 23,000 lbs -6,000 lbs - V3 = 0
Solving: V3 = 5,000 lbs
4. Integration
M3 = 5,000x + C3
a)Boundary condition to find C3: at x=16 ft M=0 ft-lbs (end of beam, no external
torque so M3=0)
Apply BC: 0 = 5,000(16) + C3
Solving: C3 = -80,000 ft-lbs
Therefore M3 = [5,000x - 80,000] ft-lbs for 12 < x < 16
Part C: Shear Force and Bending Moment Diagrams: Now using the expressions
found in Part B above, we can draw the shear force and bending moment diagrams
for our loaded beam.
V1 = -1,000x+4,000 lb, V2 = 11,000 lb, V3 = 5,000 lb
2
Solution316
Solution321
Unless otherwise indicated, all joints and support points are assumed to be pinned
or hinged joints.
Solution:
Part A:
STEP 1: Draw a free body diagram
showing and labeling all load forces
and support (reaction) forces, as well
as any needed angles and dimensions.
STEP 2: Break any forces not already
in x and y direction into their x and y
components.
STEP 3: Apply the equilibrium
conditions.
Sum Fx = Ax = 0
Sum Fy = -5,000 lbs - (1,000 lbs/ft)(8 ft) + Ay = 0
Sum TA = - (5,000 lbs)(12 ft) - (8,000 lbs)(12 ft) + Mext = 0
Solving for the unknowns:
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Stests/beams1/sol321.htm (1 of 4)6/28/2005 2:12:36 PM
Solution321
A = 13,000 lbs; M
y
ext
= 156,000 ft-lbs
Part B: Determine the Shear Forces and Bending Moments expressions for each
section of the loaded beam. For this process we will cut the beam into sections, and
then use Statics - Sum of Forces to determine the Shear Force expressions, and
Integration to determine the Bending Moment expressions in each section of the beam.
Section 1: Cut the beam at x, where 0 < x < 8 ft.
Analyze left hand section.
1. FBD. (Shown in Diagram)
2. All forces in x & y components (yes)
3. Apply translational equilibrium conditions (forces
only):
Sum Fx = 0 (no net external x- forces)
Sum Fy = 13,000 lbs - V1 = 0
Solving: V1 = 13,000 lbs
4. Integration
M1 = 13,000x + C1
a)Boundary condition to find C1: at x=0 M=-156,000 ft-lbs (That is, for a cantilever
beam, the value of the bending moment at the wall is equal to the negative of the
external moment.)
Apply BC: -156,000 = 13000(0) + C1
Solving: C1 = -156,000
Solution321
M2 = -500x + 21,000x + C2
a)Boundary condition to find C2: at x=8 ft M=-52,000 ft-lbs (from equation M1)
Apply BC: -52,000 ft-lbs = -500(8)2 + 21,000(8) + C2
Solving: C2 = -188,000 ft-lbs
2
M3 = -500x + 16,000x + C3
a)Boundary condition to find C3: at x=16 ft M=0 ft-lbs (free end of beam, no external
torque so M3=0)
Apply BC: 0 = -500(16)2 + 16,000(16) + C3
Solving: C3 = -128,000 ft-lbs
2
Solution321
in Part B above, we can draw the shear force and bending moment diagrams for our
loaded beam.
V1 = 13,000 lb, V2 = [-1,000x+21,000] lb, V3 = [-1,000x + 16,000] lb
2
Solution322
Unless otherwise indicated, all joints and support points are assumed to be
Solution:
Part A:
STEP 1: Draw a free body diagram
showing and labeling all load forces and
support (reaction) forces, as well as any
needed angles and dimensions.
STEP 2: Break any forces not already in
x and y direction into their x and y
components.
STEP 3: Apply the equilibrium conditions.
Sum Fx = Ax = 0
Sum Fy =( -2,000 lbs/ft)(6 ft) - (1,000
lbs/ft)(2 ft) + Ay = 0
Solution322
Sum TA = (-2,000 lbs/ft)(6 ft)(3 ft) - (1,000 lbs/ft)(2 ft)(11 ft) + Mext = 0
Solving for the unknowns:
A = 14,000 lbs; M
= 58,000 ft-lbs
y
ext
Part B: Determine the Shear Forces and Bending Moments expressions for each
section of the loaded beam. For this process we will cut the beam into sections,
and then use Statics - Sum of Forces to determine the Shear Force expressions,
and Integration to determine the Bending Moment expressions in each section of
the beam.
Section 1: Cut the beam at x, where 0 < x < 6 ft.
Analyze left hand section.
1. FBD. (Shown in Diagram)
2. All forces in x & y components (yes)
3. Apply translational equilibrium conditions (forces
only):
Sum Fx = 0 (no net external x- forces)
4. Integration
M1 = -1,000x + 14,000x + C1
a)Boundary condition to find C1: at x=0 M=-58,000 ft-lbs (That is, for a cantilever
beam, the value of the bending moment at the wall is equal to the negative of the
external moment.)
Apply BC: -58,000 = -1,000(0)2 + 14000(0) + C1
Solving: C1 = -58,000
Solution322
M2 = 2,000x + C2
a)Boundary condition to find C2: at x=6 ft M=-10,000 ft-lbs (from equation M1)
Apply BC: -10,000 ft-lbs = 2,000(6) + C2
Solving: C2 = -22,000 ft-lbs
Therefore M2 = [ 2,000x - 22,000] ft-lbs for 6 < x < 10
Section 3: Cut the beam at x, where
10 < x < 12 ft. Analyze left hand
section.
1. FBD. (Shown in Diagram)
2. All forces in x & y components (yes)
3. Apply translational equilibrium
conditions (forces only):
Sum Fx = 0 (no net external x- forces)
Sum Fy = 14,000 lbs - (2,000 lbs/ft)(6
ft) - (1,000 lbs/ft)(x-10)ft - V3 = 0
Solving: V3 = [-1,000x + 12,000] lbs
4. Integration
M3 = -500x + 12,000x + C3
a)Boundary condition to find C3: at x=12 ft M=0 ft-lbs (free end of beam, no
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Stests/beams1/sol322.htm (3 of 4)6/28/2005 2:12:46 PM
Solution322
Part C: Shear Force and Bending Moment Diagrams: Now using the expressions
found in Part B above, we can draw the shear force and bending moment
diagrams for our loaded beam.
V1 = [-2,000x+14,000] lb V2 = 2,000 lb V3 = [-1,000x + 12,000] lb
2
Solution323
Unless otherwise indicated, all joints and support points are assumed to be pinned
or hinged joints.
Solution:
Part A:
STEP 1: Draw a free body diagram
showing and labeling all load forces and
support (reaction) forces, as well as any
needed angles and dimensions.
STEP 2: Break any forces not already
in x and y direction into their x and y
components.
STEP 3: Apply the equilibrium
conditions.
Sum Fy = Ax = 0
Sum Fy =( -1,500 lbs/ft)(6 ft) - (1,000
lbs/ft)(4 ft) - 5,000 lbs + Ay = 0
Sum TA = (-1,500 lbs/ft)(6 ft)(3 ft) - (1,000 lbs/ft)(4 ft)(8 ft) - (5,000 lbs)(16 ft) +
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Stests/beams1/sol323.htm (1 of 4)6/28/2005 2:12:57 PM
Solution323
Mext = 0
A = 18,000 lbs; M
= 139,000 ft-lbs
ext
Part B: Determine the Shear Forces and Bending Moments expressions for each
section of the loaded beam. For this process we will cut the beam into sections, and
then use Statics - Sum of Forces to determine the Shear Force expressions, and
Integration to determine the Bending Moment expressions in each section of the beam.
Section 1: Cut the beam at x, where 0 < x < 6 ft.
Analyze left hand section.
1. FBD. (Shown in Diagram)
2. All forces in x & y components (yes)
3. Apply translational equilibrium conditions (forces only):
Sum Fx = 0 (no net external x- forces)
Sum Fy = 18,000 lbs - 1,500 lbs/ft(x) - V1 = 0
Solving: V1 = [-1,500x + 18,000] lbs
4. Integration
2
M1 = -750x + 18,000x + C1
a)Boundary condition to find C1: at x=0 M=-139,000 ft-lbs (That is, for a cantilever
beam, the value of the bending moment at the wall is equal to the negative of the
external moment.)
Apply BC: -139,000 = -750(0)2 + 18000(0) + C1
Solving: C1 = -139,000
Solution323
M2 = -500x + 15,000x + C2
a)Boundary condition to find C2: at x=6 ft M=-58,000 ft-lbs (from equation M1)
Apply BC: -58,000 ft-lbs = -500(6)2 + 15,000(6) + C2
Solving: C2 = -130,000 ft-lbs
2
Solution323
Part C: Shear Force and Bending Moment Diagrams: Now using the expressions found
in Part B above, we can draw the shear force and bending moment diagrams for our
loaded beam.
V1 = [-1,500x+18,000] lb V2 = [-1,000x+15,000] lb V3 = 5,000 lb
2
Solution324
Unless otherwise indicated, all joints and support points are assumed to be
Solution:
Part A:
STEP 1: Draw a free body diagram
showing and labeling all load forces and
support (reaction) forces, as well as any
needed angles and dimensions.
STEP 2: Break any forces not already in
x and y direction into their x and y
components.
STEP 3: Apply the equilibrium conditions.
Sum Fx = + Ax = 0
Sum Fy =( -1,500 lbs/ft)(6 ft) - (1,000
lbs/ft)(4 ft) - 5,000 lbs + Ay = 0
Solution324
Sum TA = (-1,500 lbs/ft)(6 ft)(3 ft) - (1,000 lbs/ft)(4 ft)(10 ft) - (5,000 lbs)(8 ft)
+ Mext = 0
Solving for the unknowns:
A = 18,000 lbs; M
= 107,000 ft-lbs
y
ext
Part B: Determine the Shear Forces and Bending Moments expressions for each
section of the loaded beam. For this process we will cut the beam into sections,
and then use Statics - Sum of Forces to determine the Shear Force expressions,
and Integration to determine the Bending Moment expressions in each section of
the beam.
Section 1: Cut the beam at x, where 0 < x < 6
ft. Analyze left hand section.
1. FBD. (Shown in Diagram)
2. All forces in x & y components (yes)
3. Apply translational equilibrium conditions
(forces only):
Sum Fx = 0 (no net external x- forces)
M1 = -750x + 18,000x + C1
a)Boundary condition to find C1: at x=0 M=-107,000 ft-lbs (That is, for a
cantilever beam, the value of the bending moment at the wall is equal to the
negative of the external moment.)
Apply BC: -107,000 = -750(0)2 + 18000(0) + C1
Solving: C1 = -107,000
2
Solution324
M2 = 9,000x + C2
a)Boundary condition to find C2: at x=6 ft M=-26,000 ft-lbs (from equation M1)
Apply BC: -26,000 ft-lbs = 9,000(6) + C2
Solving: C2 = -80,000 ft-lbs
Therefore M2 = [9,000x - 80,000] ft-lbs for 6 < x < 8
Section 3: Cut the beam at x,
where 8 < x < 12 ft. Analyze left
hand section.
1. FBD. (Shown in Diagram)
2. All forces in x & y components
(yes)
3. Apply translational equilibrium
conditions (forces only):
Sum Fx = 0 (no net external x-
forces)
(x - 8)ft - V3 = 0
4. Integration
M3 =-500x + 12,000x + C3
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Stests/beams1/sol324.htm (3 of 4)6/28/2005 2:13:05 PM
Solution324
a)Boundary condition to find C3: at x=12 ft M=0 ft-lbs (free end of beam, no
external torque so M3=0)
Apply BC: 0 = -500(12)2 + 12,000(12) + C3
Solving: C3 = -72,000 ft-lbs
2
Solution325
Unless otherwise indicated, all joints and support points are assumed to be
Solution:
Part A:
STEP 1: Draw a free body diagram
showing and labeling all load forces and
support (reaction) forces, as well as any
needed angles and dimensions.
STEP 2: Break any forces not already in
x and y direction into their x and y
components.
STEP 3: Apply the equilibrium conditions.
Sum Fx = Ax = 0
Sum Fy = ( -1,500 lbs/ft)(6 ft) - (1,000
lbs/ft)(2 ft) - (800 lbs/ft)(4 ft) + Ay = 0
Sum TA = (-1,500 lbs/ft)(6 ft)(3 ft)-(1,000 lbs/ft)(2 ft)(7 ft)-(800 lbs/ft)(4 ft)(10
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Stests/beams1/sol325.htm (1 of 4)6/28/2005 2:13:14 PM
Solution325
ft) + Mext = 0
Solving for the unknowns:
A = 14,200 lbs; M
= 73,000 ft-lbs
y
ext
Part B: Determine the Shear Forces and Bending Moments expressions for each
section of the loaded beam. For this process we will cut the beam into sections,
and then use Statics - Sum of Forces to determine the Shear Force expressions,
and Integration to determine the Bending Moment expressions in each section of
the beam.
Section 1: Cut the beam at x, where 0 < x < 6 ft.
Analyze left hand section.
1. FBD. (Shown in Diagram)
2. All forces in x & y components (yes)
3. Apply translational equilibrium conditions (forces
only):
Sum Fx = 0 (no net external x- forces)
Sum Fy = 14,200 lbs - 1,500 lbs/ft(x) - V1 = 0
Solving: V1 = [-1,500x + 14,200] lbs
4. Integration
M1 = -750x + 14,200x + C1
a)Boundary condition to find C1: at x=0 M=-73,000 ft-lbs (That is, for a cantilever
beam, the value of the bending moment at the wall is equal to the negative of the
external moment.)
Apply BC: -73,000 = -750(0)2 + 14200(0) + C1
Solving: C1 = -73,000
2
Solution325
M2 = -500x + 11,200x + C2
a)Boundary condition to find C2: at x=6 ft M=-14,800 ft-lbs (from equation M1)
Apply BC: -14,800 ft-lbs = -500(6)2 + 11,200(6) + C2
Solving: C2 = -64,000 ft-lbs
2
M3 =-400x + 9,600x + C3
a)Boundary condition to find C3: at x=12 ft M=0 ft-lbs (free end of beam, no
external torque so M3=0)
Apply BC: 0 = -400(12)2 + 9,600(12) + C3
Solving: C3 = -57,600 ft-lbs
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Stests/beams1/sol325.htm (3 of 4)6/28/2005 2:13:14 PM
Solution325
Solution326
Unless otherwise indicated, all joints and support points are assumed to be
Solution:
Part A:
STEP 1: Draw a free body diagram
showing and labeling all load forces
and support (reaction) forces, as well
as any needed angles and dimensions.
STEP 2: Break any forces not already
in x and y direction into their x and y
components.
STEP 3: Apply the equilibrium
conditions.
Sum Fx = Ax = 0
Sum Fy = -4,000 lbs - 3,000 lbs (2,000 lbs/ft)(6 ft) - 2,000 lbs + Ay = 0
Solution326
Sum TA = (-4,000 lbs)(4 ft) - (3,000 lbs)(8 ft) -(2,000 lbs/ft)(6 ft)(11 ft) - (2,000
lbs)(14 ft) + Mext = 0
Solving for the unknowns:
A = 21,000 lbs; M
= 200,000 ft-lbs
y
ext
Part B: Determine the Shear Forces and Bending Moments expressions for each
section of the loaded beam. For this process we will cut the beam into sections,
and then use Statics - Sum of Forces to determine the Shear Force expressions,
and Integration to determine the Bending Moment expressions in each section of
the beam.
Section 1: Cut the beam at x, where 0 < x < 4 ft.
Analyze left hand section.
1. FBD. (Shown in Diagram)
2. All forces in x & y components (yes)
3. Apply translational equilibrium conditions (forces
only):
Sum Fx = 0 (no net external x- forces)
Sum Fy = 21,000 lbs - V1 = 0
Solving: V1 = 21,000 lbs
4. Integration
M1 = 21,000x + C1
a)Boundary condition to find C1: at x=0 M=-200,000 ft-lbs (That is, for a cantilever
beam, the value of the bending moment at the wall is equal to the negative of the
external moment.)
Apply BC: -200,000 = 21000(0) + C1
Solving: C1 = -200,000
Therefore M1 = [21,000x - 200,000] ft-lbs for 0 < x < 4 ft.
Section 2: Cut the beam at x, where 4 < x < 8
ft. Analyze left hand section.
1. FBD. (Shown in Diagram)
2. All forces in x & y components (yes)
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Stests/beams1/sol326.htm (2 of 4)6/28/2005 2:13:28 PM
Solution326
M3 =-1,000x + 30,000x + C3
a)Boundary condition to find C3: at x=14 ft M=0 ft-lbs (free end of beam, no
external torque so M3=0)
Apply BC: 0 = -1,000(14)2 + 30,000(14) + C3
Solving: C3 = -224,000 ft-lbs
2
Solution326
Part C: Shear Force and Bending Moment Diagrams: Now using the expressions
found in Part B above, we can draw the shear force and bending moment diagrams
for our loaded beam.
V1 = 21,000 lb V2 = 17,000 lb V3 = [-2,000x+30,000] lb
M1 =[21,000x-200,000] ft-lb M2 = [17,000x-184,000] ft-lb M3 = [-1,000x
+30,000x - 224,000] ft-lb
reactions.
B. Find expressions for the Shear Forces and Bending Moments in each section
of the beams.
C. Draw the Shear Force and Bending Moment Diagrams for each beam. Use a
sheet of graph paper, use topic half for shear diagram and the bottom half for
1. A 10 foot beam is simply supported at its ends. A load of 500 pounds is placed
V1=300 lb, M1= 300x ft-lb; V2=-200 lb, M2 = -200x + 2000 ft-lb
load of 200 pounds per foot along its entire length. V1 = 800 - 200 x lb, M1 =
3. A 24 foot beam is simply supported at the quarter points (6 feet and 18 feet). It
has point loads of 800 pounds at each end and a point load of 1000 points at its
mid point. V1= - 800 lb, M1= - 800x ft-lb; V2 = 500 lb, M2 = 500 x -7800 ft-lb;
V3 = - 500 lb, M3 = - 500x +4200 ft-lb; V4 = 800 lb, M4 = 800x - 19,200 ft-lb
load of 400 pounds per foot over the first 6 feet and a point load of 1200 pounds
at the 10 foot mark. V1 = 2400 - 400x lb, M1 = 2400 x - 200x2 ft-lb; V2 = 0 lb,
5. A diving board is 16 feet long and pinned at the left end. It has a roller support
at the 6 foot mark. A 160 pound person stands at the right end of the board. V1 =
6. A 16 foot beam is simply supported at its left end and its midpoint. It has a
distributed load of 500 pounds per foot between the supports and a point load of
Select:
Topic 4: Beams - Table of Contents
Statics & Srength of Materials Home Page
4.
V3 = 0, M3 = 24,000 ft.-lb.
Select:
reactions.
B. Find expressions for the Shear Forces and Bending Moments in each section
of the beams.
C. Draw the Shear Force and Bending Moment Diagrams for each beam. Use a
sheet of graph paper, use topic half for shear diagram and the bottom half for
1. A 10 foot cantilever carries a point load of 800 pounds at its free end.
[V= 800 lb., M = 800x -8000 ft-lb.]
2. A 12 foot cantilever carries a load of 1200 pounds 4 feet from the wall and a
load of 600 pounds at its end, 12 feet from the wall. [V1 = 1800 lb., M1 = 1800x 12,000 ft-lb., V2 = 600 lb., M2 = 600x - 7200 ft-lb.]
3. A 10 foot cantilever has a uniformly distributed load of 400 pounds per foot
over its entire length. [V = 4000 - 400x lb., M = -2000x2 +4000x - 20,000 ft-lb.]
4. A 16 foot cantilever has a uniformly distributed load of 400 pounds per foot
from the wall to the 10 foot mark and a load of 200 pounds per foot from that
point to the end of the beam. [V1 = 5200 - 400x lb., M1 = -200x2 +5200x 35,600 ft-lb., V2 = 3200-200x lb., M2 = -100x2+3200x - 25,600 ft-lb.]
5. A 6 foot cantilever has a point load of 600 pounds at its mid point and a
uniformly distributed load of 100 pounds per foot from the midpoint to the free
end. [V1 = 900 lb., M1 = 900x - 3150 ft-lb., V2=600-100x lb., M2 = -50 x2 +
600x - 1800 ft-lb.]
6. An 8 foot cantilever was designed to carry a point load of 800 pounds at its free
end. The beam joint of the beam with the wall was found to be failing and a prop
was placed 4 feet from the wall that exerted a 400 pound upward point force on
the beam. [V1 = 400 lb., M1 = 400x -4800 ft-lb., V2=800 lb., M2 = 800x - 6400
ft-lb.]
Select:
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Beams/beamp44b1.htm (1 of 2)6/28/2005 2:25:07 PM
168,000 ft.-lb.
=
=
=
=
0, M4 = 0
3.
4.
5.
Select:
A. Draw a Free Body Diagram of the beam, showing all external loads and support
forces.
B. Determine expressions for the internal Shear Forces and Bending Moments in
each section of the beam.
C. Draw the Shear Force and Bending Moment Diagrams for the beam.
(For Solution Select: Solution Beams 4.5a)
A. Draw a Free Body Diagram of the beam, showing all external loads and support
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Beams/beamx45.htm (1 of 2)6/28/2005 2:25:19 PM
The only difference between the center of mass and the centroid is that rather
than summing the product of each bit of mass dM and the distance xi (and yi) to
an axis then dividing by the total mass, we instead divided the object into small
bits of areas dA, and then take the sum of the product of each bit of area dA and
the distance xi (and yi) to an axis then divide by the total area of the object. This
results in an Xct. and Yct location for the Centroid (center of area) of the object.
See Diagram 2
Several points to mention. We will assume all our beams have uniform density
and will not consider the case of non-uniform density beams. We will also point
out that for any beam cross section (or object) which is symmetry, the centroid
will simply be at the geometric center of the cross section. Thus for rectangular
beam and I-beams, the centroid is located at the exact center of the beam. This is
not the case for T-beams.
Centroids of Composite Areas:
Some objects or beams may be formed from several simple areas, such as
rectangles, triangles, etc. (See Diagram 3) In this case the centroid of the
compose area may be found by taking the sum of the produce of each simple area
and the distance it's centroid is from the axis, divided by the sum of the areas. For
the composite area shown in Diagram 3, the location of it's x - centroid would be
given by:
X ct = (A1 * x1 + A2 * x2 + A3 * x3 + A4 * x4)/(A1 +A2 +A3 + A4)
where x1, x2, x3, and x4 are the distances from the centroid of each simple area
to the y-axis as shown in the Diagram 3. The location of the y - centroid would be
given in like manner, although the y distances are not shown in Diagram 3:
Y ct = (A1 * y1 + A2 * y2 + A3 * y3 + A4 * y4)/(A1 +A2 +A3 + A4)
Moment of Inertia
A second quantity which is of importance when considering beam stresses is the
Moment of Inertia. Once again, the Moment of Inertia as used in Physics
involves the mass of the object. The Moment of Inertia is obtained by breaking
the object into very small bits of mass dM, multiplying these bits of mass by the
square of the distance to the x (and y) axis and summing over the entire
object. See Diagram 4.
For use with beam stresses, rather than using the Moment of Inertia as discussed
above, we will once again use an Area Moment of Inertia. This Area Moment of
Inertia is obtained by breaking the object into very small bits of area dA,
multiplying these bits of area by the square of the distance to the x (and y) axis
and summing over the entire object. See Diagram 5.
The actual value of the moment of inertia depends on the axis chosen to calculate
the moment of the inertia with respect to. That is, for a rectangular object, the
moment of inertia about an axis passing through the centroid of the rectangle is: I
= 1/12 (base * depth3) with units of inches4., while the moment of inertia with
respect to an axis through the base of the rectangle is: I = 1/3 (base * depth3)
in4. See Diagram 6. Note that the moment of inertia of any object has its smallest
value when calculated with respect to an axis passing through the centroid of the
object.
One final comment - all the summations shown above become integrations as we
let the dM's and dA's approach zero. And, while this is important and useful when
calculating Centroids and Moments of Inertia, the summation method is just as
useful for understanding the concepts involved
Return to:
Topic 5.1: Beams II- Bending Stress
or Select:
Topic 5.1: Beams II - Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
Step 1: Out first step in solving this problem is, of course, to apply static
equilibrium conditions to determine the external support reactions. In this
particular example, because of the symmetry of the problem, we will not go
through the statics in detail, but point out that the two support forces will support
the load at the center equally with forces of 5000 lb. each as shown in Diagram 2.
Step 2: The second step is to draw the shear force and bending moment
diagrams for the beam. We really don't need the shear force diagram at this point,
except we will use it to make the bending moment diagram. We will normally be
able to draw the shear force diagram by simply looking at the load forces and the
support reactions. If necessary we will determine the shear force and bending
moment expressions and make the shear force and bending moment diagrams
from these expressions, as we did in the proceeding topic.
We first draw the shear force diagram. Due to the 5000 lb. support force, the
shear force value begins at +5000 lb., and since there is no additional loads for
the next 10 feet, the shear force remains constant at 5000 lb. between 0 and 10
feet. At 10 feet, the 10,000 lb. downward load drives the shear force down by that
amount, from + 5000 lb. to a value of - 5000 lb. Then as there are no additional
loads for the next 10 feet, the shear force will remain constant over the remainder
of the beam. Graphing the shear force values produces the result in Diagram 3a.
Then using the fact that for non-cantilevered beams the bending moment values
are equal to the area under the shear force diagram, we develop the bending
moment graph shown in Diagram 3b.
Step 3. We now apply the flexure formula: Bending Stress = M y / I
We wish to find the maximum bending stress, which occurs at the outer edge of
the beam so:
M = maximum bending moment = 50,000 ft-lb. = 600,000 in-lb. (from
bending moment diagram)
y = distance from the neutral axis of the cross section to outer edge of
beam = 2 inches
This is the correct value, but it is clearly excessive for normal steel. Thus if we
tried to use a rectangular 2"x4" steel beam, it would fail under the load. We will
Notice that the maximum bending moment does not depend on the type of
beam. The values of "y" and "I" in the flexure formula do depend on the beam
used. Thus, if we had used a rectangular 2"x6" beam (instead of a 2" x 4" beam),
the value of y would be: y = 3", and the value of I would be: I = (1/12)(2" * 6"3)
= 36 in4. Then the maximum bending stress for this beam would be:
stresses in steel.
When finished with this example; Continue to:
Topic 5.2: Beams - Bending Stress (cont)
or Select:
Topic 5: Beams - Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
In the sample Beam Data Table shown below, beam information is shown. The Beam
Designation, such as W 8 x 20, gives us the following information. The "W" indicates a Wide
Flange beam. The "8" gives the approximate depth of the beam in inches. (Notice the actual
depth of the beam is 8.14"). The "20" indicates the weight per foot of the beam in a standard
type of steel. Thus the first beam in the table, W 8 x 20, is a wide flange, eight inch
deep I-beam, with a weight of 20 lb/ft. Additional information given in the table includes
the flange width and depth, the web thickness, the moment of inertia, I, about the x-x neutral
axis of the beam (shown in Diagram 1), something called the section modulus, S, which we
will discuss shortly, and the radius of gyration, r, with respect to the x-x neutral axis.
Additionally, there is also a moment of inertia, section modulus, and radius of gyration about
the y-y neutral axis. (This would apply if we flipped the beam on its side and loaded it in that
orientation. This is not usually done and so we will not expect to use the y-y axis information.).
(You may wish to print out this topic and the beam tables to study them more effectively.)
I-Beams
thick
thick
x-x
axis
x-x
axis
x-x
axis
y-y
axis
y-y
axis
y-y
axis
bf
tf
tw
in2
in
in
in
in
in4
in3
in
in4
in3
in
W 8x20
5.89
8.14
5.268
0.378 0.248
69.4
17.0
3.43
9.22
3.50
1.25
W 8x17
5.01
8.00
5.250
0.308 0.230
56.6
14.1
3.36
7.44
2.83
1.22
W 10x45
49.1
4.33
53.20
13.30
2.00
W 10x39
11.50 9.94
7.990
42.2
4.27
44.90
11.20
1.98
W 10x33
9.71
9.75
7.964
35.0
4.20
36.50
9.16
1.94
W 12x22
25.3
4.91
4.64
2.31
0.85
W 12x19
21.3
4.82
3.76
1.88
0.82
W 12x31
39.5
5.12
21.60
6.61
1.54
W 14x38
54.7
5.88
26.60
7.86
1.54
W 14x34
48.6
5.83
23.30
6.89
1.52
W 16x50
80.8
6.68
37.10
10.50
1.59
W 16x40
64.6
6.62
28.80
8.23
1.56
W 16x36
56.5
6.50
24.40
6.99
1.52
W 24x94
221.0
9.86 108.00
23.90
1.98
W 24x76
176.0
9.69
82.60
18.40
1.92
W 24x68
153.0
9.53
70.00
15.60
1.87
We now look at an example of a loaded I-beam. Please select Topic 5.2a: Bending Stress Example 2
T-Beams
We will next consider a T-beam example. In Diagram 2, we have shown a T-beam cross
section. The top horizontal section is known as the flange, and the vertical section is known as
the stem. The horizontal line passing through a portion of the T is the neutral axis. In the
diagram, y is the distance from the top of the T to the neutral axis of the beam.
In the Beam Data Table shown below, beam information is given. The Beam Designation, such
as WT 6 x 11, gives us the following information. The "WT" indicates a Wide Flange Tee
beam. The "6" gives the approximate depth of the beam in inches. (Notice the actual depth of
the beam is 6.16"). The "11" indicates the weight per foot of the beam in a standard type of
steel. Thus the first beam in the table, W 6 x 11, is a wide flange, six inch deep Tbeam, with a weight of 11 lb./ft. Additional information given in the table includes the
flange width and depth, the stem thickness, the moment of inertia, I, about the x-x neutral
axis of the beam (shown in Diagram 2), the section modulus, S, the radius of gyration, r, with
respect to the x-x neutral axis, and y, the distance from the top of the tee to the neutral axis
of the beam.
T-Beams
Designation Area
Cross
Section Info.
of T
Width
thick
thick
x-x
axis
x-x
axis
x-x
axis
x-x
axis
bf
tf
tw
d/tw
in2
in
in
in
in
in4
in3
in
in
WT 6x11
3.24
6.16
4.030
11.70
2.590
1.900 1.630
WT 6x9.5
2.80
6.08
4.007
10.20
2.300
1.910 1.650
WT 7x26.5
7.79
6.97
8.062
27.70
4.960
1.880 1.380
WT 7 x24
7.06
6.91
8.031
24.90
4.490
1.880 1.350
WT 8x25
7.36
8.13
7.073
42.20
6.770
2.400 1.890
WT 8x20
5.89
8.00
7.000
33.20
5.380
2.370 1.820
WT 8x18
5.30
7.93
6.992
30.80
5.110
2.410 1.890
8.270
10.50
8.240
WT 12x47
13.80 12.15
9.061
WT 12x42
12.40 12.05
9.015
WT 12x38
11.20 11.96
8.985
9.13
93.80
WT 15x66
WT 15x58
19.40 15.15 10.551 1.000 0.615 24.60 421.00 37.400 4.650 3.900
17.10 15.00 10.500 0.850 0.564 26.60 372.00 33.600 4.670 3.930
WT 15x54
15.90 14.91 10.484 0.760 0.548 27.20 350.00 32.100 4.690 4.020
WT18x97
28.60 18.24 12.117 1.260 0.770 23.70 905.00 67.400 5.630 4.810
WT 18x75
22.10 17.92 11.972 0.940 0.625 28.70 698.00 53.100 5.620 4.780
We now look at an example of a loaded T-beam. Please Select: Topic 5.2b: Bending
Stress - Example 3
When finished with Bending Stress Example 3,
Continue to:
Topic 5.3: Beams II - Horizontal Shear Stress
or Select:
Topic 5: Beams II - Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
STEP 1: Apply Static Equilibrium Principles and determine the external support reactions:
1.) Draw Free Body Diagram of structure (See Diagram 2)
The Bending Moment Diagram may be drawn using the Shear Force Diagram, by remembering
that (for non-cantilever beams) the value of the bending moment at a given location, x feet from
the left end, is equal to the area under the shear force diagram up to that point. Applying this,
we obtain the Bending Moment Diagram shown in Diagram 4.
STEP 3: We will now Apply the Flexure Formula to determine the maximum bending stress for
M y / I, or a special form of the Flexure Formula:
the beam. We may use Flexure Formula:
M / s, where s is what is known as the section modulus. If we rewrite the standard
flexure formula several times as follows for the maximum stress:
M (ymax / I) = M / (I / ymax) = M / s , we then see that the section modulus is
defined as s = I / ymax. That is, this special form of the flexure formula can only be used to find
the maximum bending stress, and uses the section modulus, where the section modulus is equal
to the moment of inertia of the beam cross section divided by the maximum distance from the
neutral axis of the beam to an outer edge of the beam.
As an example we apply this form to determine the maximum bending stress in our beam. First
we determine the maximum bending moment from our bending moment diagram - which we
observe from Diagram 4 is: Mmax = 20,000 ft.-lb., and occurs at x = 4 ft. (We will drop the
negative sign which simply tells us that the beam is bent concave facing downward at this point.
This means the top of the beam is in tension and the bottom of the beam is in compression.) We
also then find the x-x axis section modulus of the beam as listed in the beam table below, s =
49.1 in3
-
Designation
Area
Flange Flange
Depth Width
thick
Web
thick
x-x
axis
x-x
axis
y-y
axis
y-y
axis
y-y
axis
bf
tf
tw
in2
in
in
in
in
in4
in3
in
in4
in3
in
8.022
0.618
13.30
2.00
W 10x45
13.20 10.12
0.350 249.0
49.1
4.33 53.20
Now
M / s = (20,000 ft-lb.)(12 in./ft.)/ 49.1 in3 = 4, 890 lb./in2. (Notice that we
had to convert the bending moment in ft.-lb. to in.-lb. for the units to be consistent) We have
thus determined the maximum bending stress (axial stress) in the beam. Since the beam is
symmetric about the neutral axis, the stress at the top of the beam and at the bottom of the
beam are equal in value (4,890 psi.) with the top in tension and the bottom in compression.
Finally, we will determine the bending stress at 4 ft (where the maximum bending moment
occurs), and 8 inches above the bottom of the beam. For this we need to use the flexure formula
in the form
M y / I, where M = 20,000 ft-lb. = 240,000 in-lb., I = moment of inertia
of beam = 249 in4, and y = distance from the neutral axis to point at which we wish to
find the bending stress. Since we wish to find the bending stress 8 inches above the bottom of
the beam, and since the neutral axis is 5.06 inches above the bottom of the beam (at the beam
240,000 in-lb. * 2.94 in. / 249 in4. =
center), then y = 8 - 5.06 = 2.94 inches. Then
2
2830 lb./in . And since the location is above the beam centroid (and the bending moment is
positive), this is a tensile stress.
Return to: Topic 5.2 Beams - Bending Stress (cont.)
or Select:
Topic 5: Beams - Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
STEP 1: Apply Static Equilibrium Principles and determine the external support
reactions:
the shear force begins with a value of zero (since there is not point load or reaction
at x = 0), and then decreases at a rate of 1000 lb. per foot for the first 4 feet due
to the uniform load, resulting in a shear force value of -4000 lb. at x = 4 ft. Then,
also at x = 4 ft., there is an upward support reaction of 3,330 lb. which drives the
value of the shear force upward (from -4000 lb.) by that amount to a value of -670
lb. Next nothing happens (no loading) for the next 6 ft., so the shear force remains
constant. Then at x = 10 ft there is an upward support force of 6,670 lb. which
drives the shear force value up this amount, from a value of -670 lb. to +6000 lb.
Then from 10 ft. to 14 ft., a uniform load of 1,500 lb./ft. is applied, driving the
shear force downward at a rate of 1500 lb. per each foot for the last 4 ft (for total
of - 6000 lb), Which brings the shear force value down to zero at x = 14 ft.(See
Diagram 3).
The Bending Moment Diagram may be drawn using the Shear Force Diagram, by
remembering that (for non-cantilever beams) the value of the bending moment at
a given location, x feet from the left end, is equal to the area under the shear force
diagram up to that point. Applying this, we obtain the Bending Moment Diagram
shown in Diagram 4.
STEP 3: We will now Apply the Flexure Formula to determine the maximum
M y / I, or a
bending stress for the beam. We may use Flexure Formula:
M / s, where s is the section modulus.
special form of the Flexure Formula:
This special form of the flexure formula can only be used to find the maximum
bending stress, and uses the section modulus, where the section modulus is equal
to the moment of inertia of the beam cross section divided by the maximum
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Beams/bdsne52b.htm (2 of 4)6/29/2005 10:48:47 AM
distance from the neutral axis of the beam to an outer edge of the beam.
As an example we apply this form to determine the maximum bending stress in our
beam. First we determine the maximum bending moment from our bending
moment diagram - which we observe from Diagram 4 is: Mmax = 12,000 ft.-lb,
and occurs at x = 10 ft. (We will drop the negative sign which simply tells us that
the beam is bent concave facing downward at this point. This means the top of the
beam is in tension and the bottom of the beam is in compression.) We also then
find the x-x axis section modulus of the beam as listed in the beam table, s = 6.77
in3
Designation Area of T Width thick
thick
x-x
axis
x-x
axis
x-x
axis
x-x
axis
bf
tf
tw
d/tw
in2
in
in
in
in
in4
in3
in
in
WT8x25
7.36 8.13 7.073 0.628 0.380 21.40 42.20 6.770 2.400 1.890
Now
M / s = (12,000 ft-lb)(12 in./ft.)/ 6.77 in3 = 21,270 lb/in2.
(Notice that we had to convert the bending moment in ft.-lb. to in.-lb. for the
units to be consistent) We have thus determined the maximum bending stress
(axial stress) in the beam. Please note that this maximum stress is compressive
and occurs at the bottom of the stem, since that is the outer edge of the beam
which is farthest from the neutral axis. (The stress at the top of the tee is less than
that at the bottom of the stem, since the top of the tee is closer to the neutral axis
than the bottom of the stem.)
Finally, we will determine the bending stress at 4 ft from the left end of the beam
and 2 inches above the bottom of the beam. For this we need to use the flexure
M y / I., where M = -8,000 ft-lb = -96,000 in-lb
formula in the form
(which we determine from the bending moment graph shown in Diagram 4), I =
moment of inertia of beam = 42.2 in4, and y = distance from the neutral
axis to point at which we wish to find the bending stress. The neutral axis is
1.89 inches below the top of the beam (from the beam data table), then the neutral
axis is 8.13"-1.89" = 6.24" from the bottom of the beam. Since we wish to find
bending stress 2 inches above the bottom of the beam, then y = 6.24" - 2" = 4.24"
from the neutral axis to where we wish to determine the bending stress. Thus
96,000 in-lb * 4.24 in. / 42.2 in4. = 9,450 lb/in2. Since the bending moment
is negative, meaning the beam is bent concave facing downward, and since the
location is below the beam centroid, then this stress is compressive.
Return to:
Topic 5.2: Beams - Bending Stress (cont.)
or Select:
Topic 5: Beams - Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
In Diagram 2a, we have cut a section dx long out of the left end of the beam, and
have shown the internal horizontal forces acting on the section.
In Diagram 2b, we have shown a side view of section dx. Notice that the bending
moment is larger on the right hand face of the section by an amount dM. (This is
clear if we make the bending moment diagram for the beam, in which we see the
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Beams/bdsn53.htm (1 of 3)6/29/2005 10:48:58 AM
bending moment increases from a value of zero at the left end to a maximum at
the center of the beam.)
In Diagram 2c, we have shown a top slice of section dx. Since the forces are
different between the top of the section and the bottom of the section (less at the
bottom) there is a differential (shearing) force which tries to shear the section,
shown in Diagram 2c, horizontally. This means there is a shear stress on the
section, and in terms of the shear stress, the differential shearing force, F, can
be written as F =
times the longitudinal area of the section (b dx). A second
way of expressing the shear force is by expressing the forces in terms of the
(My/I) dA, and F2 =
(M+dM)y/I dA, then the
bending stress, that is F1 =
differential force is
we have:
F=
* b dx =
= [(dM/dx)/Ib]
F = expressions,
(dM y/I)dA, and then rewriting to solve for the shear stress:
y dA, however dM/dx is equal to the shear force V (as
= VAy'/Ib, where
V = Shear force at location along the beam where we wish to find from
A = cross sectional area, from point where we wish to find the shear
stress at, to an outer edge of the beam cross section (top or bottom)
b = width of the beam at the point we wish to determine the shear stress.
(In some texts, the product Ay' is given the symbol Q and used in the shear stress
equation)
If we consider our shear relationship a little, we observe that the Horizontal
Shear Stress is zero at the outer edge of the beam - since the area A is zero
there. The Horizontal Shear Stress is (normally) a maximum at the neutral
axis of the beam. This is the opposite of the behavior of the Bending Stress
which is maximum at the other edge of the beam, and zero at the neutral axis.
To help clarify the Horizontal Shear Stress equation we will now look at at several
example of calculating the Horizontal Shear Stress.
Please select:
Topic 5.3a: Horizontal Shear Stress - Example 1
Topic 5.3b: Horizontal Shear Stress - Example 2
When finished with the above examples, Continue to:
Topic 5.4: Beams II - Beam Selection
or Select:
Topic 5: Beams II - Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
Step 1: Out first step in solving this problem is to apply static equilibrium
conditions to determine the external support reactions. In this particular example,
because of the symmetry of the problem, we will not go through the statics in
detail, but point out that the two support forces will support the load at the center
equally with forces of 5000 lb. each as shown in Diagram 2.
Step 2: The second step is to draw the shear force and bending moment
diagrams for the beam. We really don't need the bending moment diagram, but
will include it for completeness. We have shown the shear force and bending
moment graphs in Diagram 3a and 3b. This beam is the same beam used in Topic
4.7b:Bending Stress - Example 1 Please see that example, if needed, for a
more complete explanation of how the shear force and bending moment diagrams
were made.
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Beams/bdsne53a.htm (1 of 4)6/29/2005 10:49:05 AM
Step 3. We will now apply the Horizontal Shear Stress formula: Shear Stress
= Vay'/Ib
We wish to find the maximum shear stress, which occurs at the neutral axis of
the beam:
V = maximum shear force = 5,000 ft-lb. (from the shear force diagram)
b = width of beam section where we wish to find shear stress at; b= 2 in.
y' = distance from neutral axis to the centroid of the area "a" which we
(See Diagram 4)
This is the correct value; we notice it is not very large. The beam is clearly able to
Part II We now would also like to determine the Horizontal Shear Stress 3 inches
above the bottom of the beam at the position in the beam where the shear force is
a maximum (which is actually through out the beam, since the value of shear
force is either +5000 lb., or - 5000 lb. through out the beam.)
We again apply the Horizontal Shear Stress formula: Horizontal Shear Stress =
Vay'/Ib
We wish to find the shear stress 3 inches above the bottom of the beam cross
b = width of beam section where we wish to find shear stress at; b = 2 in.
a = area from point we wish to find shear stress at (3" above bottom of
the beam) to an outer edge of beam. We will go to the top edge of the
y' = distance from neutral axis to the centroid of the area "a" which we
Then the horizontal shear stress 3 inches above the bottom of the beam is:
Horizontal Shear Stress = Vay'/Ib = (5000 lb)*(2 in2)*(1.5 in)/ (10.67
STEP 1: Apply Static Equilibrium Principles and determine the external support reactions:
1.) FBD of structure (See Diagram 2)
thick
x-x
axis
x-x
axis
x-x
axis
x-x
axis
bf
tf
tw
d/tw
in2
in
in
in
in
in4
in3
in
in
WT 8x25
7.36 8.13 7.073 0.628 0.380 21.40 42.20 6.770 2.400 1.890
Step 3. For the WT 8 x 25 T-beam (table above) we will now apply the Horizontal Shear Stress
formula:
Shear Stress = Vay'/Ib, to find the maximum shear stress, which occurs at the neutral axis
of the beam:
V = maximum shear force = 6,000 lb. (from the shear force diagram)
b = width of beam where we wish to find shear stress (neutral axis for maximum)
a = area from point we wish to find shear stress at (neutral axis) to an outer edge of
beam. In this case we will go to bottom of beam. Then a = (.38" * 6.24" )= 2.37 in2.
y' = distance from neutral axis to the centroid of the area "a" ; y' = 3.12 in. (See
Maximum Horizontal Shear Stress = Vay'/Ib = (6000 lb)*(2.37 in2)*(3.12 in)/ (42.20
We now would also like to determine the Horizontal Shear Stress 3 inches above the bottom of
the beam at the position in the beam where the shear force is a maximum
We again apply the Horizontal Shear Stress formula: Shear Stress = Vay'/Ib
We wish to find the shear stress 3 inches above the bottom of the beam cross section, where the
shear force is a maximum. (See Diagram 6)\
V = maximum shear force = 6,000 lb. (from the shear force diagram)
b = width of beam where we wish to find shear stress (3" above bottom of beam) from
a = area from point we wish to find shear stress at (neutral axis) to an outer edge of
beam. In this case we will go to bottom of beam. Then a = (.38" * 3" )= 1.14 in2. (See
Diagram 6)
y' = distance from neutral axis to the centroid of the area "a" ; y' = 4.74 in. (See
Diagram 6)
Then the horizontal shear stress 3 inches above the bottom of the beam is:
Horizontal Shear Stress = Vay'/Ib = (6000 lb)*(1.14 in2)*(4.74 in)/ (42.2 in4)(.38 in)
= 2020 lb/in2
Notice, as we expect, the horizontal shear stress value becomes smaller as we move toward an
outer edge of the beam cross section.
Part 2: W 10 x 45 beam: We would like to again determine the maximum horizontal shear
stress, and the shear stress 3 inches above the bottom of the beam (at the point where the
shear force is a maximum), but now find these values for a W 10 x 45 I-beam.
Beam Table for W 10 x 45 I-Beam
-
Designation
Area
Flange Flange
Depth Width
d
bf
Web
thick
thick
x-x
axis
x-x
axis
x-x
axis
y-y
axis
y-y
axis
y-y
axis
tf
tw
W 10 x 45
in2
in
13.20 10.12
in
in
8.022
0.618
in
in4
0.350 249.0
in3
49.1
in
in4
4.33 53.20
in3
in
13.30
2.00
We have already done the statics, and the shear force and bending moment diagrams are shown
in the first part of this example above, so we continue at the point where we apply the horizontal
shear stress formula to find the values we desire.
For the WT 8 x 25 T-beam we apply the Horizontal Shear Stress formula: Shear Stress =
Vay'/Ib, however since we are looking for the maximum shear stress in the I-Beam, we can
use the approximate formula for I-beam, Maximum Horizontal Shear Stress = Vmax/Aweb.
This says the approximate maximum shear stress in an I - Beam is equal to the maximum shear
force divided by the area of the web of the I-Beam. Applying this we have:
Vmax = maximum shear force = 6,000 lb. (from the shear force diagram)
Amax = area of web: A = (.35" * 8.88" )= 3.11 in2. (See Diagram 7)
Then Maximum Horizontal Shear Stress = (6000 lb)/(3.11 in2) = 1930 lb/in2 As long as
this approximate value is reasonably below the allowable shear stress for the beam material
there is no need to use the exact formula for the maximum shear stress. Please remember,
however, the approximate formula is only for the maximum horizontal shear stress (which occurs
are the neutral axis) in an I-Beam. If we need to know the shear stress at any other location, we
must use the standard formula as we will do in the next part.
We now wish to find the shear stress 3 inches above the bottom of the beam cross section,
where the shear force is a maximum. (See Diagram 8). To do so, we apply the standard
horizontal shear stress formula: Shear Stress = Vay'/Ib
V = maximum shear force = 6,000 lb. (from the shear force diagram)
b = width of beam where we wish to find shear stress (3" above bottom of beam) from table; b
= .35 in.
a = area from point we wish to find shear stress at (3" from the bottom) to an outer edge of
beam. In this case we will go to bottom of beam. Notice that the area is composed of the area of
the flange (A1) and part of the area of the web (A2). (See Diagrams 8 and 9.) Then a = (A1 +
A2)= (.618" x 8.022") + (2.383 in2 x .35in2) = 4.96 in2 + .834 in2= 5.794 in2 (See
Diagram 9)
y' = distance from neutral axis to the centroid of the area "a" Notice that in this case, for an I-
Beam, this is not a entirely simple matter. The area we wish to find the centroid of is not a
simple rectangle, but rather two rectangles. To find the centroid of this compound area we use:
y' = (A1 y1 + A2 y2)/(A1 +A2); where A1 and A2 are the two areas, and y1 and y2 are the
distances from the neutral axis of the beam to the centroid of each of the respective areas.
(Which is simply the distance from the neutral axis to the center of each of the respective areas,
since for a rectangle the centroid is at the center.) Using the values shown in Diagram 9, we
have:
y' = (A1 y1 + A2 y2)/(A1 +A2) = (4.96 in2 x 4.75 in + .834 in2 x 2.94 in)/(4.96 in2
+ .834 in2) = 4.49 in.
Then the horizontal shear stress 3 inches above the bottom of the beam is:
Horizontal Shear Stress = Vay'/Ib = (6000 lb)*(5.794 in2)*(4.49 in)/ (249.0 in4)(.35
in)= 1790 lb/in2
Notice, as we expect, the horizontal shear stress value becomes smaller as we move toward an
outer edge of the beam cross section.
Return to:
Topic 5.3: Beams - Horizontal Shear Stress
or Select:
Topic 5: Beams II - Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
Solution 411
Unless otherwise indicated, all joints and support points are assumed to be
pinned or hinged joints.
Solution:
Part A:
Solution 411
Sum Torque(A) = TA = -(8000 lb)(2 ft) + 9400 lb (10 ft) - (2000 lb)(11 ft) - V(12)
+ M12= 0
Solving: V
12
= 4000 lb. M
12
= -8000 ft-lb
STEP 3: Apply the Flexure Formula to determine the Maximum Bending Stress at
12 ft.
Maximum Bending Stress (MBS) = M12 /S (Where M12' is the bending moment at
'
5130 lb/in .
The Maximum bending stress occurs at the
bottom of the T-beam (since it is the outer edge
most distance from the neutral axis) The negative sign means that the beam is
bent concave downward at this point, so the bottom of the beam is in compression.
Part B:
STEP 4: To determine the Horizontal Shear Stress (HSS) at 12 ft from the left end
of the beam and 7 inches above the bottom of the beam, apply the horizontal
shear stress formula. The form we will use is: HSS = Vay'/lb
Where:
V = Shear force 12 ft from the end of the beam
a = cross sectional area from 7 in above the bottom of the beam to bottom of
beam
y' = distance from neutral axis to the centroid of area a
I = moment of inertia of the beam (177 in4 for W 12 x 50 beam)
b = width of beam a 7 in above the bottom of the beam
4
Solution412
Solution:
Part A:
components
Sum Fx = 0 none
Sum Fy = By + Dy - 2,000 lbs/ft (4 ft) 5,000 lbs = 0
Sum TB = 5,000 lbs (4 ft) - 2,000 lbs/ft
(4 ft) (6 ft) + Dy(8 ft) = 0
Solving: B = 9,500 lbs; D = 3,500 lbs
y
STEP 2: Determine the shear force and bending moment at x=6 ft.
1.) Cut beam at 6 ft. Draw the FBD of left end of beam, showing and labeling all
external forces.
Solution412
STEP 3: Apply the Flexure Formula to determine the Maximum Bending Stress
(MBS) at 6'.
MBS = M /S (Where M6' is the bending moment at 6 ft, and S is the section
6'
modulus for the beam. The section modulus is available from the Beam Tables.
The W 10 x 45 beam has a section modulus for the beam from the beam tables is
49.1 in3.)
3
Part B:
STEP 4: To determine the Horizontal Shear Stress (HSS) at 6 ft from the end of
the beam and 4 inches above the bottom of the beam, apply the horizontal shear
stress formula.
The form we will use is: HSS = Vay'/Ib
Where:
V = Shear force 6 ft from the end of the beam
a = cross sectional area from 4 in above the bottom of the beam to bottom of
beam
y' = distance from neutral axis to the centroid of area a
I = moment of inertia of the beam (249 in4 for W 10 x 45 beam)
b = width of beam a 4 in above the bottom of the beam
2
Solution413
Solution:
Part A:
components
Sum Fx = 0 none
STEP 2: Determine the shear force and bending moment at x=8 ft.
1.) Cut beam at 8 ft. Draw the FBD of left end of beam, showing and labeling all
Solution413
external forces.
Sum Fx = 0 none
Sum Fy = -1,000 lbs/ft (4 ft) + 3,330 lbs - V8 = 0
Sum TA = -1,000 lbs/ft (4 ft) (2 ft) + 3,330 lbs (4 ft)
+ M8 = 0
Solving: V = 667 lbs; M = 10,670 ft-lbs
8
STEP 3: Apply the Flexure Formula to determine the Maximum Bending Stress
(MBS) at 8'.
MBS = My/I (Where M8' is the bending moment at 8 ft, and S is the section
modulus for the beam. The section modulus is available from the Beam Tables.
This is a 2 x 12 beam.)
3
MBS = -10,670 ft-lbs(12 in/ft)(6 in) /[(1/12)(2 in)(12 in) ] = 2,667 lbs/
in
Part B:
STEP 4: To determine the Horizontal Shear Stress (HSS) at 8 ft from the end of
the beam and 3 inches above the bottom of the beam, apply the horizontal shear
stress formula.
The form we will use is: HSS = Vay'/Ib
Where:
V = Shear force 8 ft from the end of the beam
a = cross sectional area from 3 in above the bottom of the beam to bottom of
beam
y' = distance from neutral axis to the centroid of area a
I = moment of inertia of the beam (288 in4 for 2 x 12 beam)
b = width of beam a 3 in above the bottom of the beam
2
Solution414
Solution:
Part A:
components
Sum Fx = Ax = 0
- 5,000 lbs = 0
Sum TA = -5,000 lbs (12 ft) 1,000 lbs/ft (8 ft) (12 ft) + Mext
= 0
ext
= 156,000 ft-lbs
Solution414
STEP 2: Determine the shear force and bending moment at x=4 ft.
1.) Cut beam at 4 ft. Draw the FBD of left end of beam, showing and labeling all
external forces.
Sum Fx = 0 none
ft-lbs
STEP 3: Apply the Flexure Formula to determine the Maximum Bending Stress
(MBS) at 4'.
MBS = My/I (Where M4' is the bending moment at 4 ft, and S is the section
modulus for the beam. The section modulus is available from the Beam Tables.
This is a 2 x 10 beam.)
3
Part B:
STEP 4: To determine the Horizontal Shear Stress (HSS) at 4 ft from the end of
the beam and 6 inches above the bottom of the beam, apply the horizontal shear
stress formula.
The form we will use is: HSS = Vay'/Ib
Where:
V = Shear force 4 ft from the end of the beam
a = cross sectional area from 6 in above the bottom of the beam to bottom of
beam
y' = distance from neutral axis to the centroid of area a
I = moment of inertia of the beam (167 in4 for 2 x 10 beam)
b = width of beam a 6 in above the bottom of the beam
2
Solution415
Solution:
Part A:
components
Sum Fx = Ax = 0
Sum Fy = Ay - 2,000 lbs/ft (6 ft) 1,000 lbs/ft (2 ft) = 0
Sum TA = 2,000 lbs/ft (6 ft) (3 ft) 1,000 lbs/ft (2 ft) (11 ft) + Mext = 0
Solving: A = 14,000 lbs; M
y
ext
58,000 ft-lbs
STEP 2: Determine the shear force and bending moment at x=5 ft.
Solution415
1.) Cut beam at 5 ft. Draw the FBD of left end of beam, showing and labeling all
external forces.
2.) Resolve all
forces into x/y
directions.
3.) Apply
equilibrium
conditions:
Sum Fx = 0 none
Sum Fy = 14,000
lbs - 2,000 lbs/ft (5 ft) - V5 = 0
Sum TA = -2,000 lbs/ft (5 ft) (2.5 ft)+ 58,000 ft-lbs -V5(5 ft) + M5 = 0
Solving: V = 4,000 lbs; M = -13,000 ft-lbs
5
STEP 3: Apply the Flexure Formula to determine the Maximum Bending Stress
(MBS) at 5'.
MBS = M /S (Where M5' is the bending moment at 5 ft, and S is the section
5'
modulus for the beam. The section modulus is available from the Beam Tables.
The WT 8 x 29 beam has a section modulus for the beam from the beam tables is
7.0 in3.)
3
Part B:
STEP 4: To determine the Horizontal Shear Stress (HSS) at 5 ft from the end of
the beam and 6 inches above the bottom of the beam, apply the horizontal shear
stress formula.
The form we will use is: HSS = Vay'/Ib
Where:
V = Shear force 5 ft from the end of the beam
a = cross sectional area from 6 in above the bottom of the beam to bottom of
beam
y' = distance from neutral axis to the centroid of area a
I = moment of inertia of the beam (44 in4 for WT 8 x 29 beam)
b = width of beam a 6 in above the bottom of the beam
Solution415
Solution416
Solution:
Part A:
STEP 1: Determine the external support reactions:
y components
conditions:
Sum Fx = 0 none
Sum Fy = By + Dy - 1,000
6,000 lbs = 0
STEP 2: Determine the shear force and bending moment at x=10 ft.
Solution416
forces.
Sum Fx = 0 none
V10 = 0
Sum TA = -8,000 lbs (4 ft) + 23,000 lbs (8 ft) -V10(10 ft) + M10 = 0
STEP 3: Apply the Flexure Formula to determine the Maximum Bending Stress
(MBS) at 10'.
MBS = M10'/S (Where M10' is the bending moment at 10 ft, and S is the section
modulus for the beam. The section modulus is available from the Beam Tables.
The W 8 x 28 beam has a section modulus for the beam from the beam tables is
24.3 in3.)
MBS = 42,000 ft-lbs(12 in/ft)/24.3 in3 = 20,740 lbs/in2
Part B:
STEP 4: To determine the Horizontal Shear Stress (HSS) at 10 ft from the end of
the beam and 6 inches above the bottom of the beam, apply the horizontal shear
stress formula.
The form we will use is: HSS = Vay'/Ib
Where:
V = Shear force 10 ft from the end of the beam
a = cross sectional area from 6 in above the bottom of the beam to bottom of
beam
y' = distance from neutral axis to the centroid of area a
I = moment of inertia of the beam (97.8 in4 for W 8 x 28 beam)
b = width of beam a 6 in above the bottom of the beam
HSS = [(11,000 lbs)(4.62 in2)(2.76 in)]/[(97.8 in4)(.29 in)] = 4,950 psi
STEP 1: Apply Static Equilibrium Principles and determine the external support reactions.
Sum Fx = 0 none
Sum Fy = By + Dy - 2,000 lbs/ft (4 ft) - 5,000 lbs = 0
Sum TB = 5,000 lbs (4 ft) - 2,000 lbs/ft (4 ft) (6 ft) + Dy(8 ft) = 0
Solving: By = 9,500 lbs; Dy = 3,500 lbs
STEP 2: Draw both the Shear Force and Bending Moment Diagrams for the Beam, and
determine the values of the maximum bending moment and maximum shear force. The graphs
are shown in Diagram 3 and Diagram 4. (We determine these diagrams in some detail in Topic
4.8a: Bending Stress - Example 2. If you need more detail please see that example.)
From the Diagrams we observe that Mmax = -20,000 ft-lb.; and Vmax = -5000 lb.
Step 3: Use the Flexure Formula for maximum bending stress and the specifications for the
beam material to determine the minimum Section Modulus needed to carry the load. By
material specification we mean the allowable stresses (tensile, compressive, and shear) for the
beam material. This information is normally furnished by the beam supplier with their selection
of beams. For this example we will use the following allowable stresses for the beam material:
;
stress for the maximum bending stress, and solve for the value of the section modulus. Placing
values into the equation we have:
20,000 lb/in2 = (20,000 ft-lb.)(12 in./ft.)/ S; and then S = 240,000 in-lb./ 20,000 lb/
in2 = 12 in3 .
This value for the section modulus is the smallest value possible if the maximum bending stress
is not to exceed the allowable axial stress for the beam material. Shown below is a selection of
beams. We would like to now selected the best beam based on the minimum value of the section
modulus determined above. We select the beam but find the one with a section modulus equal or
greater than the minimum section modulus and with the least pounds per foot weight (which
normally means the least expensive beam). After examining the selections, we determine W 8 x
17 is the best beam from the selection listed. It has a section modulus of 14.1 in3 (greater than
the minimum section modulus of 12 in3), and a weight of 17 lb/ft, which is the least weight for
beams with a section modulus greater than the minimum from the beam selection listed below.
-
Flange Flange
Web
thick
thick
x-x
axis
x-x
axis
x-x
axis
y-y
axis
y-y
axis
y-y
axis
bf
tf
tw
in
in
in
in
in4
in3
in
in4
in3
in
7.35
6.37
6.080
0.456
0.320
53.3
16.7
2.69 17.10
5.62
1.53
W 6x20
5.88
6.20
6.018
0.367
0.258
41.5
13.4
2.66 13.30
4.43
1.51
W 6x15.5
4.56
6.00
5.995
0.269
0.235
30.1
10.0
2.57
9.67
3.23
1.46
W 8x20
5.89
8.14
5.268
0.378
0.248
69.4
17.0
3.43
9.22
3.50
1.25
W 8x17
5.01
8.00
5.250
0.308
0.230
56.6
14.1
3.36
7.44
2.83
1.22
W 8x67
19.70
9.00
8.287
0.933
0.575 272.0
60.4
3.71 88.60
21.40
2.12
W 8x40
11.80
8.25
8.077
0.558
0.365 146.0
35.5
3.53 49.00
12.10
2.04
W 8x35
10.30
8.12
8.027
0.493
0.315 126.0
31.1
3.50 42.50
10.60
2.03
W 8x31
9.12
8.00
8.000
0.433
0.288 110.0
27.4
3.47 37.00
9.24
2.01
Designation
Area
Depth Width
in2
W 6x25
Step 4. The last step is to now check that the beam we have selected is also safe with respect to
the horizontal shear stress that is, that the maximum horizontal shear stress for the selected
beam is within the allowable shear stress for the beam material. We therefore now apply our
formula for the maximum horizontal shear stress in an I-Beam:
max = Vmax/Aweb = 5000
lb/ (.230 x 7.384) = 2944 lb/in2. We see that this value is well within the allowable shear
stress of 16,000 lb/in2 given above. Thus we have selected the best beam to use from the given
list of possible beam.
We now look at an example selecting the best T-Beam to use for a particular loading.
Please Select Topic 5.4a: Beam Selection Example 1
When finished with Example of Beam Selection,
Select:
Topic 5: Beams II - Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
STEP 1: Apply Static Equilibrium Principles and determine the external support reactions:
Sum Fx =Ax = 0
Sum Fy = Ay - (1,500 lb./ft.)(6 ft) - (1,000 lb./ft.)(2 ft) - (800 lb./ft.)(4 ft) = 0
Sum TB = -(1,500 lb./ft.)(6 ft)(3 ft.)-(1,000 lb./ft.)(2 ft)(7 ft.)-(800 lb./ft.)(4 ft)(10 ft.) +
Mext = 0
Solving: Ay = 14,200 lb.; Mext = 73,000 ft-lb.
STEP 2: Draw both the Shear Force and Bending Moment Diagrams for the Beam, and
determine the values of the maximum bending moment and maximum shear force. (See
Diagrams 2 and 3.)
From the Diagrams we observe that Mmax = -73,000 ft-lb.; and Vmax = 14,200 lb.
Step 3: Use the Flexure Formula for maximum bending stress and the specifications for
the beam material to determine the minimum Section Modulus needed to carry the
load. By material specification we mean the allowable stresses (tensile, compressive, and
shear) for the beam material. This information is normally furnished by the beam supplier
with their selection of beams. The allowable stresses were given at the beginning of this
problem as: Maximum Allowable Bending Stress = 35,000 psi.; and Maximum
Allowable Shear Stress = 15,000 psi.
=Mmax / S, and use the lowest allowable
axial stress for the maximum bending stress, and solve for the value of the section
modulus. Placing values into the equation we have:
35,000 lb/in2 = (73,000 ft-lb.)(12 in./ft.)/ S; and then S = 876,000 in-lb./
35,000 lb/in2 = 25 in3 .
This value for the section modulus is the smallest value possible if the maximum bending
stress is not to exceed the allowable axial stress for the beam material. Shown below is a
selection of beams. We would like to now selected the best beam based on the minimum
value of the section modulus determined above. We select the beam but find the one with
a section modulus equal or greater than the minimum section modulus and with the least
pounds per foot weight (which normally means the least expensive beam).
After examining the selections, we determine WT 15 x 49.5 is the best beam from the
selection listed. It has a section modulus of 30.1 in3 (greater than the minimum section
modulus of 25 in3), and a weight of 49.5 lb./ft, which is the least weight for beams with a
section modulus greater than the minimum from the beam selection listed below.
-
Designation Area
Cross
Section Info.
of T
Width
thick
thick
x-x
axis
x-x
axis
x-x
axis
x-x
axis
bf
tf
tw
d/tw
in2
in
in
in
in
in4
in3
in
in
WT 7 x157
46.20
8.60
6.07
WT 7x143.5 42.20
8.41
16.130 2.093
1.310
6.42
WT 7x132
38.80
8.25
6.85
WT 7x123
36.20
8.13
7.22
12.40 13.35
9.990
9.963
WT 15x66
19.40 15.15 10.551 1.000 0.615 24.60 421.00 37.400 4.650 3.900
WT 15x62
18.20 15.08 10.521 0.930 0.585 25.80 395.00 35.300 4.650 3.890
WT 15x58
17.10 15.00 10.500 0.850 0.564 26.60 372.00 33.600 4.670 3.930
WT 15x54
15.90 14.91 10.484 0.760 0.548 27.20 350.00 32.100 4.690 4.020
WT 15x49.5 14.60 14.82 10.458 0.670 0.522 28.40 323.00 30.100 4.710 4.100
Step 4. The last step is to now check that the beam we have selected is also safe with
respect to the horizontal shear stress that is, that the maximum horizontal shear stress
for the selected beam is within the allowable shear stress for the beam material. We
therefore now apply our formula for the horizontal shear stress for the WT 15 x 49.5 Tbeam: Shear Stress = Vay'/Ib
The maximum shear stress occurs at the neutral axis of the beam:
V = maximum shear force = 14,200 lb. (from the shear force diagram)
I = moment of inertia of cross section, from beam table; I = 323 in4.
b = width of beam where we wish to find shear stress (neutral axis for maximum) from
table; b = .522 in.
a = area from point we wish to find shear stress at (neutral axis) to an outer edge of
beam. In this case we will go to bottom of beam. Then a = (.522" * 10.72" )= 5.6 in2.
y' = distance from neutral axis to the centroid of the area "a" ; y' = 5.36 in.
Maximum Horizontal Shear Stress = Vay'/Ib = (14,200 lb)*(5.6 in2)*(5.36 in)/
(323 in4)(.522 in) = 2530 lb/in2
We see that this value is well within the allowable shear stress of 15,000 lb/in2
given above. Thus we have selected the best beam to use from the given list of
possible beam.
Return to:
Topic 5.4: Beams II - Beam Selection
or Select:
Topic 5: Beams II - Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
Solution421
Unless otherwise indicated, all joints and support points are assumed to be
pinned or hinged joints.
Solution:
and dimensions.
Diagram)
y components
Sum Fx = 0 none
Sum Fy = Ay + Cy - 5,000 lbs - 1,000 lbs/ft (8 ft)= 0
Sum TA = -5,000 lbs (4 ft) + Cy (8 ft) - 1,000 lbs/ft (8 ft)(12 ft)= 0
Solving: A = -1500 lbs; C = 14,500 lbs
y
Solution421
Step 2: Draw both the Shear Force and Bending Moment Diagrams for the Beam,
and determine the values of the maximum bending moment and maximum shear
force. (See Diagrams 2 and 3.)
max
max
= 8,000
lb.
Step 3: Use the Flexure Formula for maximum bending stress and the
specifications for the beam material to determine the minimum Section
Modulus needed to carry the load. By material specification we mean the
allowable stresses (tensile, compressive, and shear) for the beam material. This
information is normally furnished by the beam supplier with their selection of
beams. The allowable stresses were given at the beginning of this problem as:
Maximum Allowable Bending Stress = 30,000 psi.; and Maximum
Allowable Shear Stress = 12,000 psi.
We now use the flexure formula form:
max
allowable axial stress for the maximum bending stress, and solve for the value of
the section modulus. Placing values into the equation we have:
2
Solution421
T-Beam Data
-
Designation Area
of T
Width
thick
thick
Cross
Section
Info.
x-x
axis
x-x
axis
bf
tf
tw
d/tw
in2
in
in
in
in
in4
in3
in
in
WT 12x34
15.600
3.700 3.070
Step 5: Now using the selected beam we check that the maximum horizontal
shear stress (HSS) in the beam is within the allowable stress.
4
lb/in which is lower than the allowable shear stress of 12,000 lb/in2. So the
beam is safe and is our best choice of the beams given to choose from.
Solution422
Unless otherwise indicated, all joints and support points are assumed to be
pinned or hinged joints.
Solution:
STEP 1: Draw a free body
diagram showing and labeling
all load forces and support
(reaction) forces, as well as
any needed angles and
dimensions.
1.) FBD of structure (See
Diagram)
2.) Resolve all forces into x/y
components
3.) Apply equilibrium
conditions:
Sum Fx = 0 none
Sum Fy = Ay + Cy - 800 lbs/ft (8 ft) - 1,200 lbs/ft (8 ft)= 0
Sum TA = -800 lbs (8 ft)(4 ft) + Cy (12 ft) - 1,200 lbs/ft (8 ft)(12 ft)= 0
Solving: A = 4270 lbs; C = 11,730 lbs
y
Solution422
STEP 2: Draw both the Shear Force and Bending Moment Diagrams for the Beam,
and determine the values of the maximum bending moment and maximum shear
force. (See Diagrams 2 and 3.)
max
max
= 6,930 lb.
Step 3: Use the Flexure Formula for maximum bending stress and the
specifications for the beam material to determine the minimum Section Modulus
needed to carry the load. By material specification we mean the allowable stresses
(tensile, compressive, and shear) for the beam material. This information is
normally furnished by the beam supplier with their selection of beams. The
allowable stresses were given at the beginning of this problem as: Maximum
Allowable Bending Stress = 35,000 psi.; and Maximum Allowable Shear
Stress = 10,000 psi.
We now use the flexure formula form:
max
allowable axial stress for the maximum bending stress, and solve for the value of
the section modulus. Placing values into the equation we have:
2
Solution422
Step 4. After examining the selections, we determine W 6 x 8.5 is the best beam
from the selection listed. It has a section modulus of 5.1 in3 (greater than the
minimum section modulus of 3.91 in3), and a weight of 8.5 lb./ft, which is the least
weight for beams with a section modulus greater than the minimum from the beam
selection listed below.
I-Beam Data
-
thick
thick
x-x
axis
x-x
axis
x-x
axis
y-y
axis
y-y
axis
y-y
axis
bf
tf
tw
in2
in
in
in
in
in4
in3
in
in4
in3
in
2.51
5.83
3.940
1.01
0.89
W 6x8.5
5.1
2.43 1.98
Step 5: Now using the selected beam we check that the maximum horizontal shear
stress (HSS) in the beam is within the allowable stress.
t
=V
max
max
/a
web
lower than the allowable shear stress of 12,000 lb/in2. So the beam is safe and is
our best choice of the beams given to choose from.
Solution423
Unless otherwise indicated, all joints and support points are assumed to be
pinned or hinged joints.
Solution:
Solution423
Step 2: Draw both the Shear Force and Bending Moment Diagrams for the Beam,
and determine the values of the maximum bending moment and maximum shear
force. (See Diagrams 2 and 3.)
max
max
= 12,000
lb.
Step 3: Use the Flexure Formula for maximum bending stress and the
specifications for the beam material to determine the minimum Section
Modulus needed to carry the load. By material specification we mean the
allowable stresses (tensile, compressive, and shear) for the beam material. This
information is normally furnished by the beam supplier with their selection of
beams. The allowable stresses were given at the beginning of this problem as:
Maximum Allowable Bending Stress = 20,000 psi.; and Maximum
Allowable Shear Stress = 10,000 psi.
We now use the flexure formula form:
max
allowable axial stress for the maximum bending stress, and solve for the value of
the section modulus. Placing values into the equation we have:
2
Solution423
minimum section modulus and with the least pounds per foot weight (which
normally means the least expensive beam).
Step 4. After examining the selections, we determine W T 16.5 x 65 is the best
beam from the selection listed. It has a section modulus of 42.2 in3 (greater than
the minimum section modulus of 38.4 in3), and a weight of 65 lb./ft, which is the
least weight for beams with a section modulus greater than the minimum from the
beam selection listed below.
T-Beam Data
-
Cross
Section
Info.
x-x axis
x-x
axis
x-x
axis
Designation
Area
of T
Width
thick
thick
x-x
axis
bf
tf
tw
d/tw
in2
in
in
in
in
in4
in3
in
in
WT 16.5x65 19.20 16.55 11.510 0.855 0.580 28.50 514.00 42.200 5.180 4.370
Step 5: Now using the selected beam we check that the maximum horizontal
shear stress (HSS) in the beam is within the allowable stress.
4
1,732 lb/in which is lower than the allowable shear stress of 10,000 lb/in2. So
the beam is safe and is our best choice of the beams given to choose from.
Solution424
Unless otherwise indicated, all joints and support points are assumed to be pinned
or hinged joints.
Solution:
Step 1: Draw a free body diagram showing
and labeling all load forces and support
(reaction) forces, as well as any needed
angles and dimensions.
1.) FBD of structure (See Diagram)
2.) Resolve all forces into x/y components
3.) Apply equilibrium conditions:
Sum Fx = 0 none
Sum Fy = Ay - 1,500 lb/ft (6 ft) - 5,000 lbs
- 1,000 lb/ft (4 ft) = 0
Sum TA = Mext - 9,000 lbs (3 ft) - 5,000 lbs (8 ft) - 4,000 lbs (10 ft)= 0
Solving: A = 18,000 lbs; M
y
ext
= 107,000 ft-lbs
Step 2: Draw both the Shear Force and Bending Moment Diagrams for the Beam,
and determine the values of the maximum bending moment and maximum shear
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Stests/beams2/sol424.htm (1 of 3)6/29/2005 10:52:32 AM
Solution424
max
max
= 18,000
lb.
Step 3: Use the Flexure Formula for maximum bending stress and the specifications
for the beam material to determine the minimum Section Modulus needed to
carry the load. By material specification we mean the allowable stresses (tensile,
compressive, and shear) for the beam material. This information is normally
furnished by the beam supplier with their selection of beams. The allowable stresses
were given at the beginning of this problem as: Maximum Allowable Bending
Stress = 25,000 psi.; and Maximum Allowable Shear Stress = 12,000 psi.
We now use the flexure formula form:
max
allowable axial stress for the maximum bending stress, and solve for the value of the
section modulus. Placing values into the equation we have:
2
Solution424
the beam but find the one with a section modulus equal or greater than the
minimum section modulus and with the least pounds per foot weight (which normally
means the least expensive beam).
Step 4. After examining the selections, we determine W 14 x 36 is the best beam
from the selection listed. It has a section modulus of 56.5 in3 (greater than the
minimum section modulus of 51.4 in3), and a weight of 36 lb./ft, which is the least
weight for beams with a section modulus greater than the minimum from the beam
selection listed below.
I-Beam Data
-
thick
thick
x-x
axis
x-x
axis
x-x
axis
y-y
axis
y-y
axis
y-y
axis
bf
tf
tw
in2
in
in
in
in
in4
in3
in
in4
in3
in
6.99
1.52
W 14x36
56.5
6.50 24.40
Step 5: Now using the selected beam we check that the maximum horizontal shear
stress (HSS) in the beam is within the allowable stress.
t
max
=V
max
/a
web
lower than the allowable shear stress of 12,000 lb/in2. So the beam is safe and is
our best choice of the beams given to choose from.
Solution425
Unless otherwise indicated, all joints and support points are assumed to be
pinned or hinged joints.
Solution:
ext
= 73,000 ft-lbs
Solution425
Step 2: Draw both the Shear Force and Bending Moment Diagrams for the Beam,
and determine the values of the maximum bending moment and maximum shear
force. (See Diagrams 2 and 3.)
max
max
= 14,200
lb.
Step 3: Use the Flexure Formula for maximum bending stress and the
specifications for the beam material to determine the minimum Section
Modulus needed to carry the load. By material specification we mean the
allowable stresses (tensile, compressive, and shear) for the beam material. This
information is normally furnished by the beam supplier with their selection of
beams. The allowable stresses were given at the beginning of this problem as:
Maximum Allowable Bending Stress = 35,000 psi.; and Maximum
Allowable Shear Stress = 15,000 psi.
We now use the flexure formula form:
max
allowable axial stress for the maximum bending stress, and solve for the value of
the section modulus. Placing values into the equation we have:
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Stests/beams2/sol425.htm (2 of 3)6/29/2005 10:52:39 AM
Solution425
35,000 lb/in = 25 in .
This value for the section modulus is the smallest value possible if the maximum
bending stress is not to exceed the allowable axial stress for the beam material.
Shown below is a selection of beams. We would like to now selected the best
beam based on the minimum value of the section modulus determined above. We
select the beam but find the one with a section modulus equal or greater than the
minimum section modulus and with the least pounds per foot weight (which
normally means the least expensive beam).
Step 4. After examining the selections, we determine WT 13.5 x 51 is the best
beam from the selection listed. It has a section modulus of 25.4 in3 (greater than
the minimum section modulus of 25 in3), and a weight of 51 lb./ft, which is the
least weight for beams with a section modulus greater than the minimum from the
beam selection listed below.
T-Beam Data
-
Cross
Section
Info.
x-x axis
x-x
axis
x-x
axis
Designation
Area
of T
Width
thick
thick
x-x
axis
bf
tf
tw
d/tw
in2
in
in
in
in
in4
in3
in
in
WT 13.5x51 15.00 13.54 10.018 0.827 0.518 26.10 258.00 25.400 4.140 3.380
Step 5: Now using the selected beam we check that the maximum horizontal
shear stress (HSS) in the beam is within the allowable stress.
4
2,480 lb/in which is lower than the allowable shear stress of 15,000 lb/in2. So
the beam is safe and is our best choice of the beams given to choose from.
Solution426
Unless otherwise indicated, all joints and support points are assumed to be pinned
or hinged joints.
Solution:
Step 1: Draw a free body diagram
showing and labeling all load forces
and support (reaction) forces, as well
as any needed angles and dimensions.
1.) FBD of structure (See Diagram)
2.) Resolve all forces into x/y
components
3.) Apply equilibrium conditions:
Sum Fx = 0 none
Sum Fy = Ay - 4,000 lbs - 3,000 lbs 2,000 lbs/ft (6 ft) - 2000 lbs = 0
Sum TA = Mext - 4,000 lbs (4 ft) - 3,000 lbs (8 ft) - 12,000 lbs (11 ft) - 2000 lb (14
ft) = 0
Solving: A = 21,000 lbs; M
y
ext
= 200,000 ft-lbs
Step 2: Draw both the Shear Force and Bending Moment Diagrams for the Beam,
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Stests/beams2/sol426.htm (1 of 3)6/29/2005 10:52:45 AM
Solution426
and determine the values of the maximum bending moment and maximum shear
force. (See Diagrams 2 and 3.)
max
max
= 21,000
lb.
Step 3: Use the Flexure Formula for maximum bending stress and the specifications
for the beam material to determine the minimum Section Modulus needed to
carry the load. By material specification we mean the allowable stresses (tensile,
compressive, and shear) for the beam material. This information is normally
furnished by the beam supplier with their selection of beams. The allowable stresses
were given at the beginning of this problem as: Maximum Allowable Bending
Stress = 40,000 psi.; and Maximum Allowable Shear Stress = 15,000 psi.
We now use the flexure formula form:
max
allowable axial stress for the maximum bending stress, and solve for the value of the
section modulus. Placing values into the equation we have:
2
Solution426
weight for beams with a section modulus greater than the minimum from the beam
selection listed below.
I-Beam Data
-
thick
thick
x-x
axis
x-x
axis
x-x
axis
y-y
axis
y-y
axis
y-y
axis
bf
tf
tw
in2
in
in
in
in
in4
in3
in
in4
in3
in
8.23
1.56
W 14x40
64.6
6.62 28.80
Step 5: Now using the selected beam we check that the maximum horizontal shear
stress (HSS) in the beam is within the allowable stress.
t
max
=V
max
/a
web
lower than the allowable shear stress of 15,000 lb/in2. So the beam is safe and is
our best choice of the beams given to choose from.
called a definite integral). For the integrated function above, the initial x value is
zero and the ending x-value is what ever value we choose.
That is for x = 2, the area under the quadratic function curve between
zero and 2 is: A = 3 (2)3 -25 (2)2 + 50 (2) = 24. Thus every y value on the
curve in Diagram 3 is equal to the sum of the area under the curve in
Diagram 2 up to that point.
(any constant) = 0
(x) = 1
(x2) = 2x
(x3) = 3x2
(xn) = n xn-1
Select:
Topic 5: Beams II - Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Beams/bdsnp56b.htm6/29/2005 10:53:00 AM
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Beams/bdsnp56c.htm6/29/2005 10:53:04 AM
at x = 3 ft, 2
at x = 9 ft, and
2. For WT 8 x 32 beam, find
bottom of beam.(53,630 psi., 2160 psi.)
at x = 10 ft, and
3. For W 8 x 40 beam, find
bottom of beam. (8113 psi., 0 psi.)
at x = 4 ft, and
4. For WT 12 x 60 beam, find
bottom of beam. (23,467 psi.; 3092 psi.)
at x = 9 ft, and
5. For W 10 x 60 beam, find
bottom of beam.(1000 psi.; 870 psi.)
Select:
Topic 5: Beams II - Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
3. (Minimum Section Modulus = 14.4 in3, bottom of beam in tension, best Ibeam, T-beam depends on beam table used)
4. (Minimum Section Modulus = 72 in3 for I-Beam; = 58.6 in3 for T-Beam;
bottom of beam in compression, best I-beam, T-beam depends on beam table
used)
5.
(Minimum Section Modulus = 45 in3 for I-Beam; = 36 in3 for T-Beam; bottom
Select:
Topic 5: Beams II - Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
1. Determine the deflection of the midpoint of a 14 foot long fir 2"x 10" beam
which carries a uniformly distributed load of 75 pounds per foot.
2. Find the maximum deflection of a 4"x 6" pine cantilever beam 6 feet long that
carries a load of 250 pounds per foot.
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Beams/bdsnp57b.htm (1 of 2)6/29/2005 10:53:22 AM
3. Find the maximum point load (acting at the end) that can be carried by a 16
foot long steel W14x48 cantilever beam if the beam end is limited to a maximum
deflection of 1/4 inch.
4. Find the minimum moment of inertia necessary for a 20 foot long, simply
supported, steel beam to deflect no more than 1/2 inch when a load of 20 tons is
applied at the center of the beam.
Select:
Topic 5: Beams II - Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
Designation Area
Width
thick
thick
bf -in
tf - in
tw in
Ain2
d - in
WT 6 x 36
10.60
6.13
x-x
axis
4.540
x-x
axis
.
x-x
axis
r - in y- in
1.480 1.02
2. A loaded, simply supported beam is shown. For this beam select the best I-beam to
use from the beam table shown below. The maximum allowable bending stress =
35,000 lb./in2 (for tension and compression), and the maximum allowable shear
stress = 10,000 lb./in2 for the beam material.
Flange Flange
Web
Cross
Section
Cross
Section
Designation
Area
Depth
Width
thick
thick
x-x axis
x-x
axis
y-y axis
y-y
axis
A-in2
d - in
bf - in
tf - in
I - in4
S - in3
I - in4
S - in3
W 5x16
4.70
5.00
5.000
0.360
0.240
21.3
8.5
7.51
3.00
W 6x20
5.88
6.20
6.018
0.367
0.258
41.5
13.4
13.30
4.43
W 6x25
7.35
6.37
6.080
0.456
0.320
53.3
16.7
17.10
5.62
W 8x17
5.01
8.00
5.250
0.308
0.230
56.6
14.1
7.44
2.83
W 8x20
5.89
8.14
5.268
0.378
0.248
69.4
17.0
9.22
3.50
W 8x31
9.12
8.00
8.000
0.433
0.288
110.0
27.4
37.00
9.24
W 8x35
10.30
8.12
8.027
0.493
0.315
126.0
31.1
42.50
10.60
W 8x40
11.80
8.25
8.077
0.558
0.365
146.0
35.5
49.00
12.10
W 10x25
7.36
10.08
5.762
0.430
0.252
133.0
26.5
13.70
4.76
W 10x29
8.54
10.22
5.799
0.500
0.289
158.0
30.8
16.30
5.61
W 10x33
9.71
9.75
7.964
0.433
0.292
171.0
35.0
36.50
9.16
W 10x39
11.50
9.94
7.990
0.528
0.318
210.0
42.2
44.90
11.20
W 10x45
13.20 10.12
8.022
0.618
0.350
249.0
49.1
53.20
13.30
W 10x54
0.618
0.368
306.0
60.4
104.00
20.70
W 10x60
0.683
0.415
344.0
67.1
116.00
23.10
tw in
W 12x19
5.59
12.16
4.007
0.349
0.237
130.0
21.3
3.76
1.88
W 12x22
6.47
12.31
4.030
0.424
0.260
156.0
25.3
4.64
2.31
W 12x27
7.95
11.96
6.497
0.400
0.237
204.0
34.2
18.30
5.63
W 12x31
12.09
6.525
0.465
0.265
239.0
39.5
21.60
6.61
W 14x34
10.00 14.00
6.750
0.453
0.287
340.0
48.6
23.30
6.89
W 14x38
11.20 14.12
6.776
0.513
0.313
386.0
54.7
26.60
7.86
W 12x53
0.576
0.345
426.0
70.7
96.10
19.20
W 14x61
0.643
0.378
641.0
92.5
107.00
21.50
W 14x87
0.688
0.420
967.0
138.0
350.00
48.20
W 16x36
10.60 15.85
6.992
0.428
0.299
447.0
56.5
24.40
6.99
W 16x50
14.70 16.25
7.073
0.628
0.380
657.0
80.8
37.10
10.50
W 18x45
13.20 17.86
7.477
0.499
0.335
706.0
79.0
34.80
9.32
W 18x60
17.70 18.25
7.558
0.695
0.416
986.0
108.0
50.10
13.30
W 24x68
20.00 23.71
8.961
0.582
0.416
1820.0
153.0
70.00
15.60
W 24x94
27.70 24.29
9.061
0.872
0.516
2690.0
221.0
108.00
23.90
1.260
0.761 15000.0
837.0
940.00
114.00
1.440
0.841 17300.0
952.0
W 36x230
9.13
Select:
Topic 5: Beams II - Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
1090.00 132.00
To solve, we first need to determine the internal torque in the shaft. We cut the
shaft a distance x from end A and draw a Free Body Diagram of the left end
section of the shaft as shown in Diagram 1b. Where we cut the shaft there is an
internal torque, which in this case must be equal and opposite to the torque at end
A for equilibrium. So for this shaft the value of the internal torque is equal to the
value of the externally applied torque.
We next simply apply the torsion formula for the shear stress:
= T r / J; where:
T is the internal torque in that section of the shaft = 1000 ft-lb = 12,000 in-lb.
r = the radial distance from the center of the shaft to the point where we wish to
find the shear stress. In this problem the outer edge of the shaft since that is
So,
= T r / J = 12,000 in-lb. * 1 in./1.57 in4. = 7,640 lb/in2.
This is the Maximum Transverse (and longitudinal) Shear Stress in the shaft.
Part II
We now would like to consider the case where the shaft is not solid, but a hollow
shaft with an outer diameter of 2" and an inner diameter of 1", as shown in
Diagram 2a. We still apply the same driving and load torque, and still have the
same value of the internal torque, as is shown in Diagram 2b.
We next apply the torsion formula for the shear stress for the hollow shaft:
= T r / J; where we observe that all the values are the same as in part one,
T is the internal torque in that section of the shaft = 1000 ft-lb = 12,000 in-lb.
r = the radial distance from the center of the shaft to the point where we wish to
find the shear stress. In this problem the outer edge of the shaft since that is
So,
= T r / J = 12,000 in-lb. * 1 in./1.47 in4. = 8,150 lb/in2.
This then is the Maximum Transverse (and longitudinal) Shear Stress in the hollow
shaft.
Return to: Topic 6.1: Torsion: Transverse Shear Stress,
Continue to: Topic 6.1b: Shear Stress - Example 2
or Select:
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Torsion/torse61a.htm (2 of 3)6/29/2005 10:53:49 AM
To solve, we first need to determine the internal torque in each section of the
shaft. We cut the shaft a distance 0' < x < 1' from end A and draw a Free Body
Diagram of the left end section of the shaft as shown in Diagram 2. Where we cut
the shaft there is an internal torque, which in this case must be equal and
opposite to the torque at end A for equilibrium. So for this shaft the value of the
internal torque is equal to the value of the externally applied torque.
T is the internal torque in that section of the shaft = 400 ft-lb. = 4,800 in-lb.
r = the radial distance from the center of the shaft to the point where we wish to
find the shear stress. In this problem r is to the outer edge of the shaft since that
So,
This value is the Maximum Transverse Shear Stress in the shaft section AB, and it
falls in a reasonable range for allowable shear stresses for metals.
We now determine the internal torque in the next section of the shaft. We cut the
shaft a distance 1' < x < 3' from end A and draw a Free Body Diagram of the left
end section of the shaft as shown in Diagram 3. Where we cut the shaft there is
an internal torque, and by mentally summing torque, we see that in order to have
rotational equilibrium we must have an internal torque in section BC of 1200 ft-lb.
acting in the direction shown.
We apply the torsion formula for the shear stress once again:
= T r / J; where:
T is the internal torque in that section of the shaft = 1,200 ft-lb. = 14,400 in-lb.
r = the radial distance to the outer edge of the shaft since that is where the
So,
= T r / J = 14,400 in-lb. * 1 in./ 1.57 in4. = 9,170 lb./in2.
This then is the Maximum Shear Stress in shaft section BC. We note that even
though the internal torque is much larger in section BC as compared to section AB,
because of the size of the shaft in section BC, the shear stress is much lower in BC.
We now determine the internal torque in the next section of the shaft. We cut the
shaft a distance 3' < x < 4' from end A and draw a Free Body Diagram of the left
end section of the shaft as shown in Diagram 4. Where we cut the shaft there is
an internal torque. From the Free Body Diagram we see that in order to have
T is the internal torque in that section of the shaft = 300 ft-lb. = 3,600 in-lb.
r = the radial distance from the center of the shaft to the outer edge of the shaft
since that is where the transverse shear stress is a maximum; r = .25 in.
So,
= T r / J = 3,600 in-lb. * .25 in./ .0061 in4. = 147,500 lb./in2.
This is the Maximum Shear Stress in shaft section CD. We note that this is much
larger than the ultimate shear stress most metals, thus this section of the shaft
Return to:
Topic 6.1: Torsion: Transverse Shear Stress
or Select:
Topic 6: Torsion, Rivets & Welds - Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
= T L / J G ; where
The shaft has a diameter of 1.5 inch. We would like to determine the angle of
twist of end B with respect to end A.
To find the angle of twist we first determine the internal torque in the shaft. We
cut the shaft a distance x feet from the left end, and make a free body diagram of
the left section of the shaft - shown in Diagram 2b. From the free body diagram,
we see that the internal torque must be 1000 ft-lb. to satisfy rotational equilibrium.
We next apply the Angle of Twist formula:
= T L / J G ; where
T = 1000 ft-lb. = 12,000 in-lb.
L = 2 ft. = 24 inches
= .5 in4.
Then,
= T L / J G = (12,000 in-lb.* 24 in) / (.5 in4 * 12 x 106 lb/in2) = .048
radians = 2.75o.
The angle of twist will have units of radians, and in this problem is clockwise with
respect to end A as shown in Diagram 3.
We also take a moment to calculate the maximum shear stress in the shaft, just
out of interest in it's value.
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Torsion/tors62.htm (2 of 3)6/29/2005 10:54:10 AM
Continue to:
Topic 6.3: Torsion - Power Transmission
or Select:
Topic 6: Torsion, Rivets & Welds - Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
In Diagram 1b we have shown the shaft from end on. Notice that to apply a
torque to a shaft we must exert a force, F, usually at the outer edge of the shaft.
This force may be applied through use of a belt or gear. The product of the force
(F) and the radius (r) is the applied (or load) torque.
The work done as we rotate the shaft will be the product of the force and the
distance the force acts through - which is the circumference. That is, for each
revolution of the shaft, the force act through a distance of one circumference, or
we may write:
Work = F x d = F * (2 p r) * (# revolutions)
The Power sent down the shaft is then the Work per unit time, or if we divide the
equation for Work above by the time we can write:
Power = Work/Time = F * (2 p r) * (# rev/time)
If we now rewrite the above equation slightly, as below:
Power = 2 p ( F * r) * (# rev/sec)
Then we recognize the (F * r) term is the torque in the shaft, and we can rewrite
as:
Power = 2 p T n (ft-lb./sec) where T = Torque in ft-lb.; n = # rev/sec
This is the formula for power transmitted in foot-pounds/second. It is often more
convenient to express it in horsepower (1 hp = 550 ft-lb./sec) as shown below.
Power hp = [2 p T n / 550 ft-lb/sec/hp]
Solution: First we mentally note that since this is a simple shaft with equal
external driving and load torque, then the internal torque will be equal in value to
Solution:
Step 1: First, using the maximum allowable shear stress, we determine the
largest torque which may be applied to the shaft. The formula for the shear stress
in a shaft is:
J / r ; where
= T r / J ; then solving for the torque: T =
J = (3.1416) d4 / 32 = .098 in4; r = .5 inch; and
= 12.000 lb/in2, (We
use the allowable shear stress as the maximum stress in the shaft.) Putting values
into the equation and solving:
T = 12,000 lb/in2 * .098 in4 / .5 in = 2356 in-lb = 196 ft-lb.
Step 2: Now that we have the maximum torque we can safely apply, we can
determine the largest amount of power we can transmitted from the horsepower
equation.
Php = 2 pi T n/ 550 = 2 (3.1416) 196 ft-lb. (40 rev/s)/ (550 ft-lb/s/hp) =
90 hp
Continue to:
Topic 6.3b: Power Transmission - Example 2
or Select:
Topic 6: Torsion, Rivets & Welds - Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Torsion/torse63a.htm6/29/2005 10:54:20 AM
Solution:
Step 1. We first use the horsepower equation to determine the amount of torque
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Torsion/torse63b.htm6/29/2005 10:54:27 AM
Solution:
Step 1. We first determine the amount of horsepower being transmitted through
each section of the compound shaft. In section AB, we can see that 100 hp must
being transmitted internally through the shaft from B to A. In section BC, with a
little thought, we realize that the amount of power being transmitted through BC
must be 400 hp - of which 240 hp is taken off at point C, and the remaining 160
hp. continues through shaft CD, and is taken off at point D.
Step 2. Now that we know the horsepower in each section of the shaft, we use
the horsepower equation to determine the amount of torque which is being applied
to each shaft.
Power hp = [2 pi T n / 550 ft-lb/s/hp]
have:
CD
Continue to:
Topic 6.3d: Compound Shaft - Example 4
or Select:
Topic 6: Torsion, Rivets & Welds - Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
1. Determine the maximum shear stress in each of the sections of the shaft.
2. Determine the horsepower being transmitted through each section of the
shaft.
3. Determine the resultant angle of twist of a point on end D with respect to a
point on end A.
Modulus of Rigidity: Steel = 12 x 106 lb/in2.; Brass = 6 x 106 lb/in2.; Aluminum
= 4 x 106 lb/in2.
Step 1. To solve, we first need to determine the internal torque in each section of
the shaft. We cut the shaft a distance 0' < x < 1' from end A and draw a Free
Body Diagram of the left end section of the shaft as shown in Diagram 2. Where
we cut the shaft there is an internal torque, which in this case must be equal and
opposite to the torque at end A for equilibrium. So for this shaft the value of the
internal torque is equal to the value of the externally applied torque.
TAB = 600 ft-lb.
We now determine the internal torque in the next section of the shaft. We cut the
shaft a distance 1' < x < 3' from end A and draw a Free Body Diagram of the left
end section of the shaft as shown in Diagram 3. Where we cut the shaft there is
an internal torque, and by mentally summing torque, we see that in order to have
rotational equilibrium we must have an internal torque in section BC of TBC =
1200 ft-lb. acting in the direction shown.
We now determine the internal torque in the last section of the shaft. We cut the
shaft a distance 3' < x < 4' from end A and draw a Free Body Diagram of the left
end section of the shaft as shown in Diagram 4. Where we cut the shaft there is
an internal torque. From the Free Body Diagram we see that in order to have
rotational equilibrium we must have an internal torque in section CD of TCD = 400
ft-lb. acting in the direction shown.
Step 2. Using the internal torque in each section (TAB = 600 ft-lb = 7,200 in
lb., TBC = 1200 ft-lb. = 14,400 in-lb., TCD = 400 ft-lb. = 4,800 in-lb.), we
now apply the torsion formula for the shear stress: = T r / J
4
2
AB = 7,200 in-lb * .5 in / [pi(1") / 32] = 36,700 lb/in .
BC
CD
Step 3. Again using the internal torque in each section, we determine the
horsepower transmitted through each shaft section.
PAB=2 pi Tn/(550 ft-lb/s/hp)=2*3.1416*600 ft-lb.*(40 rev/s) /(550 ft
lb/s/hp)= 274 hp
PBC=2 pi Tn/(550 ft-lb/s/hp)=2*3.1416*1200 ft-lb.*(40 rev/s) /(550 ft
lb/s/hp)=548 hp
PCD=2 pi Tn/(550 ft-lb/s/hp)=2*3.1416*400 ft-lb.*(40 rev/s) /(550 ft
lb/s/hp)= 183 hp
Step 4. Apply the Angle of Twist relationship to each section of the shaft.
AB
radians = 4.18o.
BC
radians = 2.12o.
CD
radians = 8.88o.
Then the total twist of end D with respect to end A will be:
total
taken from the direction of the internal torque in each section. In this example, AB
- counter clockwise, BC - clockwise, and CD - clockwise, resulting in the (+, -, -)
signs of the angles of twist.
Continue to:
Topic 6.4: Torsion - Problem Assignment
or Select:
Topic 6: Torsion, Rivets & Welds - Table of Contents
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Torsion/torse63d.htm (3 of 4)6/29/2005 10:54:39 AM
Solution511
Part A:
Section I:
From equilibrium condtions:
Solution511
fCD = TL/JG = (400 ft-lb)(12 in./ft)(1 ft)(12 in/ft)/[(3.1416 * (.75 in)4 / 32)
AB
BC
CD
solution512
Part A:
Section I:
From equilibrium condtions:
solution512
fBC = TL/JG = (1,000 ft-lb)(12 in./ft)(2 ft)(12 in/ft)/[(3.1416 * (1.5 in)4 / 32)
fCD = TL/JG = (200 ft-lb)(12 in./ft)(1.5 ft)(12 in/ft)/[(3.1416 * (.5 in)4 / 32)
AB
BC
CD
Solution513
Part A:
Section I:
From equilibrium condtions:
Solution513
Solving: T
CD
Section II:
Solving: T
BC
Section III:
From equilibrium condtions:
1570 ft-lb.
Solution513
fCD = TL/JG = (124 ft-lb)(12 in./ft)(1 ft)(12 in/ft)/[(3.1416 * (.75 in)4 / 32)
(12x106 lb/in2)] = .0479 radians (cw)
f
=+f
- f -f = .06 radians (cw)
Total
AB
BC
CD
Solution514
Part A:
Section I:
From equilibrium condtions:
Section II:
From equilibrium condtions:
Sum of Torque = 600 ft-lb - 2000 ft-lb + TBC
= 0; So TBC = 1400 ft-lb
Then: HP = 2T / 550 ft-lb/s / hp = 2 (40
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Stests/torsion/sol514.htm (1 of 2)6/29/2005 10:55:01 AM
Solution514
Section III:
Solution515
Part A:
Solution515
Section I:
From equilibrium condtions:
Section II:
From equilibrium condtions:
fBC = TL/JG = (180 ft-lb)(12 in./ft)(2 ft)(12 in/ft)/[(3.1416 * [(1 in)4 - (.8 in)4] /
AB
BC
Solution516
Part A:
Section I:
From equilibrium condtions:
Solution516
Section II:
From equilibrium condtions:
Sum of Torque = TAB - 600 ft-lb - 200 ft-lb = 0; So TAB = 800 ft-lb
fBC = TL/JG = (200 ft-lb)(12 in./ft)(3 ft)(12 in/ft)/[(3.1416 * [(2 in)4 - (1.6 in)
4]
AB
BC
2. A vice is clamped by applying a force of 50 pounds at each end of a 4 inch arm on a shaft.
The shaft is solid 3/8 inch diameter steel. Determine the maximum shear stress in the shaft.
(19,320 psi)
4. The drive shaft of a car is a hollow steel shaft with an outside diameter of 3 inches and a
wall thickness of 1/8 inch. Determine the polar section modulus of the shaft. What is the
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Torsion/torsp64a.htm (2 of 3)6/29/2005 10:55:21 AM
maximum shear stress in the shaft when it has a torque applied equal to 2200 inch pounds.
(2.34 in4, 1410 psi)
5. A 3/4 inch solid steel shaft is 8 inches long. The maximum allowable stress for the shaft is
12,000 psi. Determine the maximum torque that can be transmitted by the shaft. What is the
angle of twist for the shaft? G= 12x106 psi. (82.84 ft-lb, .0213 rad)
6. A 1/32 inch twist steel drill has a torque of 0.1 inch pounds applied. The free length of the
drill is 2 inches long. Find the maximum torsional stress in the drill. Determine the angle of
twist of drill. (16.7 x 103 psi, .178 rad)
7. The steel drive shaft of a car has a torque applied of 1600 inch pounds. The drive shaft is 4
feet long and 2.5 inches in diameter with a 1/16 diameter wall thickness. Determine the
maximum shear stress in the shaft and the angle of twist. (5415 psi, .01733 rad)
8. A hollow steel shaft 2 inches in diameter and 3 feet long with 1/16 inch walls is used in an
auger. Determine the angle of twist of the shaft when a torque of 5000 inch pounds is applied
to one end of the shaft. What is the maximum shear stress in the shaft? (.042 rad, 13, 990
psi)
9. A three foot wooden dowel 1/4 inch in diameter has a torque of 5 inch pounds applied.
Determine the angle of twist of the dowel and the maximum shear stress in the wood. G =
1.04x106 psi. (1630 psi, .4513 rad)
Select:
Topic 6: Torsion, Rivets & Welds - Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
Select:
Topic 6: Torsion, Rivets & Welds - Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Torsion/torsp64b.htm6/29/2005 10:55:25 AM
Determine
Determine
Determine
Determine
the
the
the
the
8. The chain ring on a bicycle has 42 teeth and the free wheel has 15 teeth. A
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Torsion/torsp64c.htm (1 of 2)6/29/2005 10:55:28 AM
force of 150 pounds is applied to the 7 inch peddle arm. The chain ring has 3 teeth
per inch.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Determine
Determine
Determine
Determine
the
the
the
the
Select:
Topic 6: Torsion, Rivets & Welds - Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
in2.
1. A hollow steel shaft with an outer diameter of 2 inches and an inner diameter of
1.75 inches is attached to circular disk with a radius of 5 inches, as shown in
Diagram 1. A force of 2,000 lb. is applied to the outer edge of the disk.
A. What is the maximum shear stress which develops in the hollow shaft?
B. What is the angle of twist which develops in the shaft?
C. If the maximum allowable shear stress in the shaft is 20,000 lb/in2, how large a
force could be applied to the outer edge of the disk?
In a Lap Joint, two plates are overlapped and rivets or bolts penetrate the two
plates connecting them together.
In a Butt Joint, the two main plates are butted up against each other and then
covered with one or two cover plates. Then rivets or bolts penetrate the cover
plates and the two main plates connecting them together. The load is transferred
through one main plate to the cover plates by the rivets and then transferred back
to the second main plate. There is a symmetric rivet pattern above each main
plate as shown in Diagram 2.
The distance between rivets in a row in riveted (bolted) joint pattern is known as
the Pitch. The distance between rows in a riveted (bolted) joint pattern is known
as the Back Pitch (or Transverse Pitch, or Gauge). The first row (row 1) of a
pattern is the row which is closest to the applied load. As a general guideline for
steel or aluminum plates, the minimum pitch is three times the diameter of the
rivet (bolt), and the edge pitch (distance from the nearest rivet to the edge) is 1.5
times the rivet (bolt) diameter.
Joint Failure: There are a number of ways in which a riveted (bolted) joint may
fail.
1. Rivet Shear: As shown in Diagram 3, a side view of a lap joint, the rivet area
between the two main plates is in shear. We obtain the formula for the Strength of
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Torsion/rivw65.htm (2 of 6)6/29/2005 10:55:45 AM
the Joint in Rivet Shear by simply using the definition of the shear stress - which is
the force parallel to the area in shear divided by area. Thus if we take the
allowable shear stress for the rivet material times the cross sectional area of the
rivet this gives us the load one rivet area could carry in shear before it failed (By
failed, we mean having exceeded the allowable stress.)
So we can write:
all.
Where:
N = Number of areas in shear. This equals the number of rivets in a lap joint or in
a butt joint with one cover plate, and twice the number of rivets in a butt joint
A = pi * d2/4 (or pi * r2) is the cross sectional area of the rivet in shear.
Again if the load is large enough, the rivet material may fail in compression. Which
will fail first in compression depends, of course, on the maximum allowable
compressive stress for the rivet and plate material - the lowest allowable
compressive stress material will fail first.
To determine the load which will cause failure, we again multiply the stress by the
area. In this case, it is common practice to take the area in compression as the
vertical cross sectional area of the rivet (Diagram 5), for both the area of the rivet
in compression and the area of plate in compression.
So we can write:
Pbearing = N (d*t)
all
, where
all
3. Plate Tearing: This is a tensile failure of the plate material normally at the
rivet row positions, that is, the plate will tear first where the holes are in the plate,
just as paper towels tear where the perforations are located.
As is shown in Diagram 6, if we cut the plate material at rivet row 1 and look at
the left end section, we see that for equilibrium the plate material is in tension. To
determine the applied load, P, the plate can carry before it would fail in tension,
we multiply the allowable tensile stress by the area in tension. This area is the
cross sectional area of the plate which, if solid, would be the width of the plate
times the thickness of the plate (A = w*t). However, we have cut the plate at rivet
row 1, and we have to subtract the diameter of the rivet from the width of the
plate (since the area of the plate is reduce due to the rivet hole).
all.,
where
We will consider only the three main modes of failure discussed above.
We will now look at several examples of Riveted Joints,
Please select :
Topic 6.5a: Riveted Joints - Example 1
Topic 6.5b: Riveted Joints - Example 2
When finished with Riveted Joints Examples, Continue to:
Topic 6.6:Rivets & Welds - Riveted Joint Selection
or Select:
Topic 6: Torsion, Rivets & Welds - Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
Plate:
= 14,000 lb/in2,
2
t = 22, 000 lb/in ,
2
t = 20, 000 lb/in ,
2
c = 24, 000 lb/in
2
c = 23, 000 lb/in
We would like to determine the Strength of the Joint, and the Efficiency of the
Joint.
Part 1: To determine the Strength of the Joint, we calculate the load, P, which will
cause the joint to fail in each of the main modes of failure (Rivet Shear, Bearing,
and Plate Tearing). The lowest load which will cause the joint to fail is known as
the Strength of the Joint. Please remember that the term failure of the joint in
these problems does not mean when the joint actually breaks, but rather we
consider the joint to have failed when the stress in the joint exceed the allowable
stress. At this point the joint may or may not actually fail depending on the safety
factor used in the determining the allowable stress, and of course, depending on
how much the allowable stress is exceeded.
1. Rivet Shear: The load the joint can carry before failing in rivet shear is given
by:
P = N (pi * d2/4) = ( 9 rivet areas)* [3.1416 * (5/8)2/4]*16, 000 lb/
in2 = 44,200 lb.
Thus at a load of 44, 200 lb., the joint will fail in shear. Please note we used the
allowable shear stress for the rivet material in our equation, as it is the rivet (not
the plate) which fails in shear.
2. Bearing (compression) Failure: We next determine the load the rivet or
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Torsion/rivwe65a.htm (1 of 3)6/29/2005 10:55:52 AM
This is the load which will cause shear row 2 to fail in tension. We see that it is
lower than the load that will cause row 1 to fail (that is, the joint would fail at row
2 before row 1), however the joint will still fail first in rivet shear (44,200 lb.) since that is the lowest applied load which will cause the joint to exceed the
allowable stress.
3b. Plate Tearing (Row 3): Since the joint would fail at row 2 before row 1, we
need now to continue and determine the load at which row 3 would fail. As there
are a total of 3 rivets in row 1 and row 2, this means that 3/9 of the load has been
transferred to the bottom plate, and thus the plate material at row 3 carries only
6/9 of the load, P. Then we can write:
(6/9)Prow3 = (w - n d)t
all
Here we see that load which causes row 3 to fail in tension is much larger than the
loads which would cause row 1 and row 2 to fail. This means we can stop here.
Of all the loads which will cause the joint to fail (either in shear, compression, or
tension) the lowest is still the rivet shear - 44,200 lb., and this is the final
Strength of the Joint, the largest load we can safely apply.
Part II. By itself the strength of the joint does not really tell us how 'good' the
joint is. The way we determine how good or efficient a joint we have is to compare
the strength of the joint with the strength of the plate if it were solid (no riveted
or bolted joint). The strength of the joint is 44,200 lb., found above. The strength
of the plate we determine by realizing that if it is solid the joint will fail in tension
(plate tearing). See Diagram 2. And we can write:
Plate Strength = area of plate cross section times allowable tensile stress for plate
material, or
Pplate = (w * t) *
all = (6" * 1/2") * 20,000 lb/in2 = 60,000 lb.
This is the plate strength, and we then define the joint efficiency as the ratio of
the Joint Strength to the Plate Strength, or
Efficiency = Joint Strength / Plate Strength = 44,200 lb. / 60,000 lb.
= .737 = 73.7 %. This tells us that the joint can carry 73.7 percent of what the
solid plate could carry.
Return to: Topic 6.5: Rivets & Welds - Riveted Joints
or Select:
Topic 6: Torsion, Rivets & Welds - Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
2
t = 22, 000 lb/in ,
2
t = 21, 000 lb/in ,
2
c = 24, 000 lb/in
2
c = 22, 000 lb/in
We would like to determine the Strength of the Joint, and the Efficiency of the
Joint.
Part 1. To determine the Strength of the Joint, we calculate the load, P, which will
cause the joint to fail in each of the main modes of failure (Rivet Shear, Bearing,
and Plate Tearing). The lowest load which will cause the joint to fail is known as
the Strength of the Joint.
For a butt joint we use only one half of the joint pattern, since if one side fails, the
main plate on that side has failed and the joint has failed. We will consider the left
half of the joint pattern in this example.
1. Rivet Shear: The load the joint can carry before failing in rivet shear is given
by:
P = N (pi * d2/4) = ( 12 rivet areas)* [3.1416 * (3/4)2/4]*18, 000 lb/
in2 = 95,400 lb.
Notice that we use 12 rivet areas since each of the six rivets in the left half of the
pattern has two areas in shear in the double cover plate butt joint. (See Diagram
2) Thus at a load of 95,400 lb., the joint will fail in shear.
This is the load which will cause shear row 2 to fail in tension. We see that it is
larger than the load that will cause row 1 to fail (that is, the joint would fail at row
1 before row 2), however the joint will still fail first in bearing (compression)
failure at 49,500 lb. - since that is the lowest applied load which will cause the
joint to exceed the allowable stress.
3b. Plate Tearing (Row 3): Since the load which causes row 2 to fail is larger
than the load which causes row 1 to fail, we normally do not have to check row 3,
since that should fail at a even larger load. However, we will check row 3, simply
as an exercise.
As there are a total of 3 rivets in row 1 and row 2, this means that 3/6 of the load
has been transferred to the bottom plate, and thus the plate material at row 3
carries only 3/6 of the load, P. Then we can write:
2
(3/6)Prow2 = (w - n d)t
all = (6"- 3* 3/4") *(1/2") * (21,000 lb/in ) =
39,400 lb., and then:
Here we see that load which causes row 3 to fail in tension is much larger than the
loads which would cause row 1 and row 2 to fail. Of all the loads which will cause
the joint to fail (either in shear, compression, or tension) the lowest is still the
bearing failure, 49,500 lb., and this is the final Strength of the Joint, the
largest load we can safely apply.
Part II. By itself the strength of the joint does not really tell us how 'good' the
joint is. The way we determine how good or efficient a joint we have is to compare
the strength of the joint with the strength of the plate is it were solid (no riveted
or bolted joint). The strength of the joint is 49,500 lb., found above. The strength
of the plate we determine by realizing that if it is solid the joint will fail in tension
(plate tearing). See Diagram 3.
Pplate = (w * t) *
all
plate strength, and we then define the joint efficiency as the ratio of the Joint
Strength to the Plate Strength, or
Efficiency = Joint Strength / Plate Strength = 49,500 lb. / 63,000 lb.
= .786 = 78.6 %. This tells us that the butt joint can carry 78.6 percent of what
the solid plate could carry.
Return to: Topic 6.5: Rivets & Welds - Riveted Joints
Continue to: Topic 6.6: Rivets & Welds - Riveted Joint Selection
or Select:
Topic 6: Torsion, Rivets & Welds - Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
Rivets:
Plate:
2
t = 22, 000 lb./in ,
2
t = 20, 000 lb./in ,
2
c = 25, 000 lb./in
2
c = 24, 000 lb./in
Step 1: Calculate the load which would cause the joint to fail in plate tearing at
row 1 - assuming one rivet in row 1. We use the plate tearing relationship:
. , where
Prow1 = (w - n d)t
all
= Maximum allowable tensile stress for the plate material = 20, 000 lb./in2,
N = Number of areas in shear For 1 rivet in a lap joint this will be 1 area; N = 1
d = 3/4 inch
= 16,000 lb./in2
all
000 lb./in2
Pbearing = 1 * [(3/4") * (1/2")] * 24, 000 lb./in2 = 9000 lb./rivet
Step 4. Divide the allowable load in plate tearing, calculated in step 1, by the
small of the loads one rivet could carry from steps 2 and 3, and round up to
determine the number of rivets which will result in the most efficient joint.
# Rivets = 52, 500 lb. / 7070 lb./rivet = 7.43 ; rounding up # rivets = 8
Solution: Part B
We use the number of rivets found in Part A above to select the best joint pattern
from the given set of patterns. From Diagram 1 above we select the a lap joint
pattern with correct number of rivets. (See Diagram 3.)
Solution: Part C
Finally, using the selected joint pattern from part B, we calculate the strength and
1.) Rivet Shear: We have already determined that one rivet can carry 7070 lb./
rivet, so the total load the joint can carry in rivet shear will be the product of the
number of rivets and the allowable load per rivet: Pshear = 8 * 7070 lb./rivet =
56,560 lb.
2.) Bearing Failure: Again, we have already calculated the allowable load per rivet
in bearing = 9000 lb./rivet. The total load the joint can carry in bearing
(compression) will be the product of the number of rivets and the allowable load
per rivet: Pbearing = 8 * 9000 lb./rivet = 72,000 lb.
3.) Plate Tearing (row 1): We have already calculated plate tearing at row 1, in
step 1 above. Prow1 = (6" - 1 * 3/4")*(1/2") * 20, 000 lb./in2 = 52,500 lb.
However, now that we have selected the rivet pattern, we also need to calculate
plate tearing at row 2 (and perhaps row 3)
4.) Plate Tearing (row 2): Row 2 carries 7/8 of the load, so we write:
(7/8)Prow2 = (6" - 2 * 3/4")*(1/2") * 20, 000 lb./in2 = 45,000 lb., and
then
Prow2 = (8/7) 45,000 lb. = 51, 400 lb. Notice, that this loading is the lowest,
up to this point, to cause failure, and so it is currently the strength of the joint.
However, we will continue and check the load which causes row 3 to fail.
5.) Plate Tearing (row 3): Row 2 carries 5/8 of the load, so we write:
Considering all the modes of failure, we see: Strength of the Joint is 51,400 lb.
(plate tearing row 2), and
Efficiency = Joint Strength / Plate Strength = 51,400 lb./(6"*1/2")
*20,000 lb./in2 = .86 =86%
This is the most efficient joint for the dimensions and allowable stresses of both
the plates and rivets. By changing the size of the rivets (and the material and
associated allowable stresses) we could arrive at a joint of greater efficiency. This
type of problem is easily done using current computer spreadsheet methods.
Continue to: Topic 6.6a: Riveted Joint Selection - Example 1
or Select:
Topic 6: Torsion, Rivets & Welds - Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
Rivets:
Plate:
2
t = 24, 000 lb/in ,
2
t = 22, 000 lb/in ,
2
c = 26, 000 lb/in
2
c = 24, 000 lb/in
Solution: Part A
Step 1: Calculate the load which would cause the joint to fail in plate tearing at
row 1 - assuming one rivet in row 1. We use the plate tearing relationship:
. , where
Prow1 = (w - n d)t
all
= Maximum allowable tensile stress for the plate material = 22, 000 lb/in2,
N = Number of areas in shear. For 1 rivet in a double cover plate butt joint this
will be 2 area; so N = 2
d = 5/8 inch
= 15,000 lb/in2
all
000 lb/in2
Pbearing = 1 * [(5/8") * (3/4")] * 24, 000 lb/in2 = 11,250 lb./rivet
Step 4. Divide the allowable load in plate tearing, calculated in step 1, by the
smallest of the loads one rivet could carry from steps 2 and 3, and round up to
determine the number of rivets which will result in the most efficient joint.
# Rivets = 105, 200 lb. / 9200 lb./rivet = 11.43 ; rounding up # rivets =
12
Solution: Part B
We use the number of rivets found in Part A above to select the best joint pattern
from the given set of patterns. From Diagram 1 above we select the a lap joint
pattern with correct number of rivets. (See Diagram 3.)
Solution: Part C
Finally, using the selected joint pattern from part B, we calculate the strength and
1.) Rivet Shear: We have already determined that one rivet can carry 9,200 lb./
rivet, so the total load the joint can carry in rivet shear will be the product of the
number of rivets and the allowable load per rivet: Pshear = 12 * 9200 lb/rivet =
110,400 lb.
2.) Bearing Failure: Again, we have already calculated the allowable load per
rivet in bearing = 9000 lb./rivet. The total load the joint can carry in bearing
(compression) will be the product of the number of rivets and the allowable load
per rivet: Pbearing = 12 * 11,250 lb./rivet = 135,000 lb.
3.) Plate Tearing (row 1): We have already calculated plate tearing at row 1, in
step 1 above. Prow1 = (7" - 1 * 5/8")*(3/4") * 22, 000 lb/in2 = 105,200 lb.
However, now that we have selected the rivet pattern, we also need to calculate
plate tearing at row 2 (and perhaps row 3)
4.) Plate Tearing (row 2): Row 2 carries 11/12 of the load, so we write:
(11/12)Prow2 = (7" - 2 * 5/8")*(3/4") * 22, 000 lb/in2 = 94,875 lb., and
then
Prow2 = (12/11) 94,875 lb. = 103,500 lb. Notice, that this loading is the
lowest, up to this point, to cause failure, and so it is currently the strength of the
joint. However, we will continue and check the load which causes row 3 to fail.
5.) Plate Tearing (row 3): Row 3 carries 9/12 of the load, so we write:
(9/12)Prow3 = (7" - 2 * 5/8")*(3/4") * 22, 000 lb/in2 = 94,875 lb., and
then
Prow3 = (12/9) 94,875 lb. = 126,500 lb. This loading is much larger than the
loading which will cause row 2 to fail, so we can stop here.
Considering all the modes of failure, we see: Strength of the Joint is 103,500
lb. (plate tearing row 2),and Efficiency = Joint Strength / Plate Strength =
Solution601
Part A:
Part B:
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Stests/rivweld/sol601.htm6/29/2005 10:56:27 AM
Solution602
A.) Calculate
the strength of
the joint.
B.) Calculate
the efficiency
of the joint.
Part A:
131,250 lb
115,500 lb
Pplate,row 2 = (10/9)(115,500 lb) = 128,350 lb
Then strength of joint equals lowest load causing failure = 128,350 lb
Part B:
T,
Solution602
plate
Solution603
191,750 lb
Solution603
Part B:
Strength of joint will be Plate Tearing at Row 1 = 191,750 lbs; Unless Row 2 is
lower; So check Row 2.
psi) = 175,500 lb
Pplate,row 2 = (27/26)(175,500 lb) = 182,250 lb (Since row 2 is lower
than row 1, also check row 3.)
psi) = 159,250 lb
Pplate,row 3 = (27/24)(159,250 lb) = 179,160 lb
So Strength of joint is plate Tearing Row 2 = 179,160 lbs.
efficiency = strength of joint/strength of solid plate = strength/(w*t)sT,
plate
Solution604
177,375 lb
Solution604
Part B:
Strength of joint will be Plate Tearing at Row 1 = 177,375 lbs; Unless Row 2 is
165,000 lb
P
= (12/11)(165,000 lb) = 180,000 lb
plate, row 2
T,
plate
Solution605
Rivet:
136,875 lb
Solution605
Part B:
Strength of joint will be Plate Tearing at Row 1 = 136,875 lbs; Unless Row 2 is
(8/9) Pplate, row 2 = (w - nd)t* = (10 in - (2* 0.875 in))(0.75 in)(20,000 psi) =
123,750 lb
P
= (9/8)(123,750 lb) = 139,220 lb
plate,row 2
T,
plate
Solution606
A.) Calculate
the strength
of the joint.
B.) Calculate
the efficiency
of the joint.
Part A:
152,250 lb
133,875 lb
Pplate,row 2 = (8/6)(133,875 lb) = 178,500 lb
Then strength of joint equals lowest load causing failure = 144,300 lb
Part B:
T,
Solution606
plate
The gap is then filled with weld material as from an arc welder, and the plates are
welded together. Depending on the size and thickness of the plates, the end edges
to be welded together may by sloped or vee-ed to generate a better weld. In
theory, a butt weld can be made as strong or stronger than the plate, depending
on the weld material used. In practice, the strength of a weld depends on how well
the weld is made, whether or not there are voids or cracks in the weld. In some
situations the weld may be x-rayed to determine its quality. For a welded butt
joint loaded in tension as shown in Diagram 1b, the load, P, the weld can carry in
tension is simply the product of the cross sectional area of the weld and the
allowable tensile stress for the weld material, or:
Pweld = (w * t) *
tension, where w and t are the width and thickness of the
weld (plate).
A second type of weld which we will consider is the Lap Joint using a 45 degree
fillet weld, shown in Diagrams 2, 3, and 4. In an example of this type of weld a
top plate is welded to a bottom plate. The fillet weld runs from the top edge of the
top plate to an equal distance horizontally outward on the top of the bottom plate,
forming a triangular weld as shown in the cross sectional view in Diagram 2a.
Since the two sides of the right triangle formed by the weld are equal forming a
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Torsion/rivw67.htm (1 of 5)6/29/2005 10:57:00 AM
45o right triangle, the weld is known as a 45o fillet weld. The perpendicular line
bisecting the 90o angle and intersecting the hypotenuse of the 45o fillet weld is
know as the throat of the weld, shown in Diagram 2a. When the weld fails, it is
assumed to fail in shear across the throat region. To determine the load a weld
can carry before failing we take the product of the area of the weld which fails in
shear ( the throat distance times the length of weld, Diagram 2b) and the
allowable shear stress for the weld material.
We can write:
Pweld = Area*
all
= (throat * length) *
finally
Pweld = (.707 t * L) *
all
= (t sin 45o * L) *
, where
all
all,
and
Following that, we will then determine the minimum number of inches of weld
needed to make the weld strength as great as the plate strength.
The allowable stresses are as follows;
= 14,000 lb/in2 ;
t = 24,000 lb/in2
Weld Material:
Plate Material:
= 15,000 lb/in2 ;
t = 30,000 lb/in2
Dimensions: AB = GF = 20 inches; CD = 3 inches; DE = 5 inches
Solution:
Part 1. We first determine the minimum inches of weld needed to carry the
80,000 lb. load by using the weld formula and setting the load the weld can carry
before failing to 80,000 lb..
, or
Pweld = (.707 t * L) *
all
about G:
(Notice that the force FGF does not produce a torque about point G, since its line of
action passes through point G.)
Solving the torque equation for LAB = 6.73 inches, we can then solve for LGF
since LAB and LGF sum to 10.78 inches. Therefore LGF = 10.78" - 6.73" = 4.05"
This is how the weld must be distributed in order to carry the 80,000 lb. load (and
satisfy static equilibrium conditions).
Part 3. The other question of interest in welded joints is exactly how much weld is
needed to make the welded joint as strong as the plate itself. In this case we
assume the plate is loaded in tension, and so the strength of the plate is Pplate =
product of cross sectional area of plate and the allowable tensile stress for the
t . We then set this equal to the strength of
plate material, or Pplate = (w * t )
the riveted joint and solve for the length of weld needed.
t , or
Pweld = (.707 t * L) * all = Pplate =(w * t )
(.707 t * L) *
all
= (w * t )
t , and then
(.707 *3/4" * L) * 14,000 lb/in2 = (8" * 3/4" ) 30,000 lb/in2 , then solving
for L
L = 24.25 inches
This is the minimum inches of weld needed to make the weld as strong as the
plate (in tension). We can not state how the weld should be distributed, since we
are not dealing with a specific loading.
Continue to: Topic 6.7a: Welded Joints - Example 1
or Select:
Topic 6: Torsion, Rivets & Welds - Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
A.) Determine the minimum inches of weld need to carry the 90,000 lb. load and
specify how many inches of weld should be placed along each side AB and FG.
B.) Determine the number of inches of weld needed to make the weld strength as
about G:
Solving the torque equation for LAB = 5.19 inches, we can then solve for LGF
since LAB + LGF + 10" must sum to 16.98 inches. Therefore LGF = 16.98" - 5.19"
- 10" = 1.79" This is how the weld must be distributed in order to carry the
80,000 lb. load (and satisfy static equilibrium conditions).
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Torsion/rivwe67a.htm (2 of 3)6/29/2005 10:57:19 AM
Part 3.. We assume the plate is loaded in tension, and so the strength of the plate
is Pplate = product of cross sectional area of plate and the allowable tensile stress
for the plate material, or Pplate = (w * t )
strength of the riveted joint and solve for the length of weld needed.
t , or
Pweld = (.707 t * L) * all = Pplate =(w * t )
(.707 t * L) *
all
= (w * t )
t , and then
(.707 *.5" * L) * 15,000 lb/in2 = (10" * .5" ) 28,000 lb/in2 , then solving
for L
L = 26.4 inches
This is the minimum inches of weld needed to make the weld as strong as the
plate (in tension). We can not state how the weld should be distributed, since we
are not dealing with a specific loading.
Return to: Topic 6.7: Rivets & Welds - Welded Joints
Continue to: Topic 6.8: Rivets & Welds - Problem Assignment
or Select:
Topic 6: Torsion, Rivets & Welds - Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
Solution711
t= 24,000 psi
Plate Material: = 15,000 psi, t= 30,000 psi
Dimensions:
AB = GF = 20 inches:
CD = 3 inches: DE = 5 inches
Solution:
Part A.
Part I: We first determine the minimum inches of weld needed to carry the 80,000
lb. load by using the weld formula and setting the load the weld can carry before
failing to 80,000 lb..
Pweld = (.707 t * L) * all , or
80,000 lb = (.707 * .5" * L) * 12,000 lb/in2 = (4,242 lb./in.)*L; then solving
for L
L = 80,000 lb./(4,242 lb./in.) = 18.86 inches.
This is the minimum inches of weld needed to carry the load, however since the
80,000 pound load is not applied symmetrically to the plate, we can not apply the
weld symmetrically. That is, if we try to put equal amounts of weld on sides AB and
GF, the weld will fail in this case. To determine how the weld should be distributed,
we once again apply static equilibrium conditions.
Part II.
In Diagram 2 we have shown the weld distributed with an amount LAB on side AB,
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Stests/rivweld/sol711.htm (1 of 3)6/29/2005 10:57:26 AM
Solution711
LGF on side GF, and 8 inches of weld completely across the end AG.The lengths
LAB , LGF ,and the 8 inches of weld must sum to 18.86 inches ( the minimum inches
of weld needed). The maximum force these weld can resist with is given by FAB =
(4,242 lb./in.)* LAB , FGF = (4,242 lb./in.)* LGF , and FAG = 4,242 lb/in * 8" =
33,936 lb. as shown in Diagram 2. We now apply static equilibrium conditions to
the top plate:
Sum of Forces: 80,000 lb. - (4,242 lb./in.)* LAB - (4,242 lb./in.)* LGF 33,936 lb. = 0
Sum of Torque
about G:
point G.)
Part B:
We assume the plate is loaded in tension, and so the strength of the plate is Pplate
= product of cross sectional area of plate and the allowable tensile stress for the
t . We then set this equal to the strength of
plate material, or Pplate = (w * t )
the riveted joint and solve for the length of weld needed.
t , or
Pweld = (.707 t * L) * all = Pplate =(w * t )
(.707 t * L) *
all
= (w * t )
t , and then
(.707 *.5" * L) * 12,000 lb/in2 = (8" * .5" ) 30,000 lb/in2 , then solving for L
L = 28.29 inches
This is the minimum inches of weld needed to make the weld as strong as the plate
(in tension). We can not state how the weld should be distributed, since we are not
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Stests/rivweld/sol711.htm (2 of 3)6/29/2005 10:57:26 AM
Solution711
Solution712
CD = 2 inches: DE = 4 inches
Solution:
Part A.
Part I: We first determine the minimum inches of weld needed to carry the 80,000
lb. load by using the weld formula and setting the load the weld can carry before
failing to 80,000 lb..
= (.707 t * L) * all , or
P
weld
Solution712
LGF on side GF, and 6 inches of weld completely across the end AG.The lengths
LAB , LGF ,and the 6 inches of weld must sum to 10.1 inches ( the minimum inches
of weld needed). The maximum force these weld can resist with is given by FAB =
(7,918 lb./in.)* LAB , FGF = (7,918 lb./in.)* LGF , and FAG = 7,918 lb/in * 6" =
47,510 lb. as shown in Diagram 2. We now apply static equilibrium conditions to
the top plate:
Sum of Forces: 80,000 lb. - (7,918 lb./in.)* L
- (7,918 lb./in.)* L
AB
47,510 lb. = 0
Sum of Torque
GF
about G
AB
* (6") +
point G.)
equation for L
AB
GF
= .36" This is how the weld must be distributed in order to carry the 80,000 lb.
Part B:
We assume the plate is loaded in tension, and so the strength of the plate is Pplate
= product of cross sectional area of plate and the allowable tensile stress for the
t . We then set this equal to the strength of
plate material, or Pplate = (w * t )
the riveted joint and solve for the length of weld needed.
= (.707 t * L) *
=P
=(w * t )
t , or
P
weld
(.707 t * L) *
all
all
= (w * t )
plate
t , and then
2
(.707 *.7" * L) * 16,000 lb/in = (6" * .7" ) 28,000 lb/in , then solving for L
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Stests/rivweld/sol712.htm (2 of 3)6/29/2005 10:57:33 AM
Solution712
L = 14.85 inches
This is the minimum inches of weld needed to make the weld as strong as the plate
(in tension). We can not state how the weld should be distributed, since we are not
dealing with a specific loading.
Solution713
all
Solution713
AB
Sum of Torque
- (5,303 lb./in.)* L
GF
about G
AB
=0
* (8") = 0
(Notice that the force FGF does not produce a torque about point G, since its line of
action passes through point G.)
Solving the torque equation for L
AB
GF
how the weld must be distributed in order to carry the 60,000 lb. load (and satisfy
static equilibrium conditions).
Part B.
The other question of interest in welded joints is exactly how much weld is needed
to make the welded joint as strong as the plate itself. In this case we assume the
plate is loaded in tension, and so the strength of the plate is Pplate = product of
cross sectional area of plate and the allowable tensile stress for the plate material,
t . We then set this equal to the strength of the riveted joint
or Pplate = (w * t )
and solve for the length of weld needed.
= (.707 t * L) *
=P
=(w * t )
P
weld
(.707 t * L) *
all
all
= (w * t )
plate
t , or
t , and then
2
(.707 * .5" * L) * 15,000 lb/in = (8" * .5" ) 28,000 lb/in , then solving for L
L = 21.12 inches
Solution713
This is the minimum inches of weld needed to make the weld as strong as the plate
(in tension). We can not state how the weld should be distributed, since we are not
dealing with a specific loading
Solution714
Solution714
side AB and an amount LGF on side GF.The lengths LAB and LGF must, of course sum
to 17.32 inches ( the minimum inches of weld needed). The maximum force these
weld can resist with is given by FAB = (6,929 lb./in.)* LAB , and FGF = (6,929 lb./in.)
* LGF , as shown in Diagram 2. We now apply static equilibrium conditions to the
top plate:
Sum of Forces: 120,000 lb. - (6,929 lb./in.)* LAB - (6,929 lb./in.)* LGF = 0
Sum of Torque
about G:
(Notice that the force FGF does not produce a torque about point G, since its line of
action passes through point G.)
Solving the torque equation for LAB = 11.55 inches, we can then solve for LGF
since LAB and LGF
sum to 17.32 inches.
Therefore LGF =
17.32" - 11.55" =
5.77" This is how
the weld must be
distributed in order
to carry the 120,000
lb. load (and satisfy
static equilibrium
conditions).
Part B.
The other question of interest in welded joints is exactly how much weld is needed
to make the welded joint as strong as the plate itself. In this case we assume the
plate is loaded in tension, and so the strength of the plate is Pplate = product of
cross sectional area of plate and the allowable tensile stress for the plate material,
t . We then set this equal to the strength of the riveted joint
or Pplate = (w * t )
and solve for the length of weld needed.
Pweld = (.707 t * L) * all = Pplate =(w * t )
(.707 t * L) *
all
= (w * t )
t , or
t , and then
(.707 * .7" * L) * 14,000 lb/in2 = (9" * .7" ) 35,000 lb/in2 , then solving for L
L = 31.82 inches
This is the minimum inches of weld needed to make the weld as strong as the plate
(in tension). We can not state how the weld should be distributed, since we are not
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Stests/rivweld/sol714.htm (2 of 3)6/29/2005 10:57:49 AM
Solution714
Rivets:
Plate:
2
t = 22, 000 lb/in ,
2
t = 20, 000 lb/in ,
2
c = 25, 000 lb/in
2
c = 24, 000 lb/in
Determine the Strength of the Joint, and the Efficiency of the Joint.
(Ps = 79,520 lb., Pb = 108,000 lb, Pr1 = 72,500 lb, Pr2 = 70,910 lb, Pr3 = 76,700
lb)
2. A riveted butt joint is shown in Diagram 2. The diameter of the rivets is 1/2
inch. The width of the plates is 6 inches, and the thickness of the plates is 3/4
inch. The allowable stresses are as follows:
Rivets:
2
t = 22, 000 lb/in ,
2
c = 24, 000 lb/in
Plate:
= 17,000 lb/in2,
2
t = 20, 000 lb/in ,
2
c = 21, 000 lb/in
Determine the Strength of the Joint, and the Efficiency of the Joint.
(Ps = 63,620 lb., Pb = 70,880 lb, Pr1 = 82,500 lb, Pr2 = 84,375 lb, Pr3 = 101,250
lb)
3. A lap joint (Diagram 3) is to connect two steel plates both with a width of 7
inches and a thickness of 5/8 inch. The rivets to be used have a diameter of 3/4
inch. The maximum allowable stresses for the rivet and plate materials are as
follows:
Rivets:
Plate:
2
t = 21, 000 lb/in ,
2
t = 22, 000 lb/in ,
2
c = 23, 000 lb/in
2
c = 25, 000 lb/in
A. Determine the number of rivets for the most efficient joint. (ans. 9.7 = 10
rivets)
B. Select the best pattern from those shown in Diagram 4. (ans. 10,11,12 pattern)
C. Calculate the strength and efficiency of the joint. (ans. Pr2 = 82,500, eff = .857)
4. A double cover plate butt joint (Diagram 5) is to connect two steel plates both
with a width of 10 inches and a thickness of 5/8 inch.
The rivets to be used have a diameter of 3/4 inch. The maximum allowable
Rivets:
Plate:
2
t = 22, 000 lb/in ,
2
t = 20, 000 lb/in ,
2
c = 23, 000 lb/in
2
c = 21, 000 lb/in
A. Determine the number of rivets for the most efficient joint. (ans. 11.75 = 12
rivets)
B. Select the best pattern from the patterns in Diagram 6. (11-12 pattern)
C. Calculate the strength and efficiency of the joint. (ans. Pr1 = 115, 625 lb; eff
= .925)
5. A lap joint is to connect two steel plates each with thickness of 3/4 inch
(Diagram 7). The rivets to be used have a diameter of 1/2 inch. The maximum
allowable stresses for the rivet and plate materials are as follows:
Rivets:
Plate:
2
t = 22, 000 lb/in ,
2
t = 24, 000 lb/in ,
2
c = 27, 000 lb/in
2
c = 26, 000 lb/in
A. Calculate the width needed for the steel plate such that the joint will fail in
bearing and plate tearing at row 1at the same load. (ans. w = 4.83")
B. Using the width found in part A, determine the strength and efficiency of the
joint.
(Ps = 23,562 lb., Pb = 78,000 lb, Pr1 = 77,940 lb, Pr2 = 78,790 lb)
[Joint Strength = 23,562 (lowest of failure loads above); eff. = .27, not a very
good joint]
6. A a double cover plate butt joint is to connect two steel plates each with
thickness of 3/4 inch ( See Diagram 8). The rivets to be used have a diameter of
1/2 inch. The maximum allowable stresses for the rivet and plate materials are as
follows:
Rivets:
Plate:
2
t = 24, 000 lb/in ,
2
t = 25, 000 lb/in ,
2
c = 28, 000 lb/in
2
c = 26, 000 lb/in
A. Calculate the width needed for the steel plate such that the joint will fail in rivet
shear and plate tearing at row 1 at the same load. (ans. 2.5", very small width,
B. Using the width found in part A, determine the strength and efficiency of the
joint.
(Ps = 37,700 lb., Pb = 58,500 lb, Pr1 = 37,500 lb, Pr2 = 33,750 lb, Pr3 = 37,500 lb)
7. Two steel plates are shown below. The top plate is 1/2 inch thick and 10 inches
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Torsion/rivwp68a.htm (4 of 5)6/29/2005 10:57:58 AM
wide, and is to be welded to the bottom plate with a 45o fillet weld. The top plate
is to be weld completely across end AG and partially along sides AB and FG.
A.) Determine the minimum inches of weld need to carry the 120,000 lb. load and
specify how many inches of weld should be placed along each side AB and FG.
B.) Determine the number of inches of weld needed to make the weld strength as
great as the plate strength.
The allowable stresses are as follows;
= 16,000 lb/in2 ;
t = 25, 000 lb/in2
Weld Material:
Plate Material:
= 15,000 lb/in2 ;
t = 26,000 lb/in2
Dimensions: AB = GF = 20 inches; CD = 3 inches; DE = 7 inches
(ans.Part A. Ltotal =21.2"; LAB = 9.85"; LAG = 10" (given); LGF = 1.35")
(ans.Part B. Ltotal = 22.98")
Select:
Topic 6: Torsion, Rivets & Welds - Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
St(ult)
A36 carbon
58 (400)
Sp(all) = (1.5)St(ult)
Allowable Tensile
Stress
(Gross)
St(all) = (0.60)
Sy
(all)
Sy
87 (600)
36 (250)
(Net)
22 (152)
St
= (0.50)St(ult)
29*(200)
Slip-Critical
Connection
Bearing-Type
Connection
10.0(68.9)
17.0(117)
21.0(145)
17.0(117)
30.0(207)
21.0(145)
28.0(193)
21.0(145)
40.0(276)
17.5(121)
22.0(152)
1. Determine the allowable tensile load for the single shear lap joint shown. Assume that the
threads are excluded from the shear plane. The plates are ASTM A36 steel and the bolts are
(Rivet Shear = 212,000 lb., Plate Bearing = 391,500 lb., Plate Tearing= 77,000 lb)
2. Determine the allowable tensile load for the double shear butt joint shown. Assume that the
threads are excluded from the shear plane. The plates are ASTM A36 steel and the bolts are
(Rivet Shear = 188,500 lb., Plate Bearing = 174,000 lb., Plate Tearing= 68,750 lb)
3. Determine the number of 3/4 inch bolts needed for a maximum efficiency lap joint of two 8" x
1/2" plates. The plates are ASTM A36 steel and the bolts are A325.
[ For Joint use Bearing Type connection, and A325 bolts --- threads excluded from shear plane]
(6 rivets)
4. Determine the number of 3/4 inch bolts needed for a maximum efficiency butt joint of two 8"
x 1/2" plates. The cover plates are 8" x 9/16". The plates are ASTM A36 steel and the bolts are
A325.
[ For Joint use Bearing Type connection, and A325 bolts --- threads excluded from shear plane]
(3 rivets)
5. Calculate the allowable tensile load for the connection in the diagram shown. The plates are
ASTM A36 steel and the weld is a 3/4 in. fillet weld, which is made using an E70 electrode.
[E70 electrode has allowable tensile stress of 70,000 psi.; and allowable shear stress of 30% of
tensile stress]
(Weld strength (shear) = 178,160 lb.; Plate strength (tension) = 99,000 lb. ]
6. In the connection in the diagram shown, 1/4 in. side and end fillet welds are used to connect
the 2.0 in. by 1.0 in tension member to the plate. The applied load is 65,000 lb. Find the
required dimension L. The steel is ASTM A36 and the electrode used is an E70.
[E70 electrode has allowable tensile stress of 70,000 psi.; and allowable shear stress of 30% of
tensile stress]
7. Design the fillet welds parallel to the applied load to develop the full allowable tensile load of
the 6 in. by 3/8 in. ASTM A36 steel plate in the diagram shown. The electrode is an E70. The
[E70 electrode has allowable tensile stress of 70,000 psi.; and allowable shear stress of 30% of
tensile stress]
(L = 1.45")
8.A fillet weld between two steel plates intersecting at right angles was made with one 3/8 in.
leg and one 1/2 in leg using an E70 electrode. Determine the strength of the weld in kips/in.
[E70 electrode has allowable tensile stress of 70,000 psi.; and allowable shear stress of 30% of
tensile stress]
Select:
Topic 6: Torsion, Rivets & Welds - Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
in2.
A. Determine the maximum torque which could be applied at points D, C, & B (TD,
TC, & TB) without exceeding the allowable shear stress in any section of the shaft.
B. Using the torque found in part A, determine the resultant angle of twist of end
D with respect to end A.
(For Solution Select: Torsion - Solution Problem 1)
2. A 2 foot long hollow steel shaft with an outer diameter of 2 inches and an inner
diameter of 1.5 inches is to transmit power while being driven a 3000 rpm.
A.) If the allowable shear stress in the shaft is 15,000 lb/in2., what is the
maximum horsepower which can be transmitted down the shaft ?
B.) If we were not given the outer diameter of the shaft, but were told that the
inner diameter was to be four-tenths of the outer diameter, what would be the
minimum outer diameter of the shaft which could safely transmit the horse power
found in part A? (The allowable shear stress in the shaft is 15,000 lb/in2 )
(For Solution Select: Torsion - Solution Problem 2)
Rivets:
Plate:
2
t = 26, 000 lb/in ,
2
t = 22, 000 lb/in ,
2
c = 28, 000 lb/in
2
c = 24, 000 lb/in
Determine the Strength of the Joint, and the Efficiency of the Joint.
(For Solution Select: Rivets & Welds - Solution Problem 1)
2. A double cover plate butt joint (Diagram 2) is to connect two steel plates both
with a width of 9 inches and a thickness of 7/8 inch. The rivets to be used have a
diameter of 3/4 inch.
The maximum allowable stresses for the rivet and plate materials are as follows:
Rivets:
Plate:
2
t = 22, 000 lb/in ,
2
t = 24, 000 lb/in ,
2
c = 23, 000 lb/in
2
c = 26, 000 lb/in
3. Two metal plates are shown below. The top plate is 3/4 inch thick and 9 inches
wide, and is to be welded to the bottom plate with a 45o fillet weld. The top plate
is to be weld completely across end AG and partially along sides AB and FG.
A.) Determine the minimum inches of weld need to carry the 100,000 lb. load and
specify how many inches of weld should be placed along each side AB and FG.
B.) Determine the number of inches of weld needed to make the weld strength as
great as the plate strength.
The allowable stresses are as follows;
Weld Material:
= 12,000 lb/in2 ;
t = 24, 000 lb/in2
Plate Material:
= 13,000 lb/in2 ;
t = 22,000 lb/in2
Dimensions: AB = GF = 20 inches; CD = 3 inches; DE = 6 inches
(For Solution Select: Rivets & Welds - Solution Problem 3)
Select:
Topic 6: Torsion, Rivets & Welds - Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
thick
Cross
Section
Info.
x-x
axis
Cross
Section
Info.
y-y
axis
A-in2 d - in wf - in tf - in
tw - in I - in4
S -in3
r - in
I - in4
S -in3
r - in
W 10x29
8.54
0.289 158.0
30.8
4.30
16.30
5.61
1.38
10.22 5.799
0.500
Or, after finding for ASTM-A36 Steel, E = 29 x 106 lb/in2, and yield stress = 36,000 lb/in2, we can solve
and determine that Le/r = 89.
The Euler Buckling Load is then give by:
or Select:
Topic 7: Columns & Pressure Vessels - Table of Content
Strength of Materials Home Page
Then Slenderness ratio is given by: Le / r = ( 8 ft x 12"/ft)/.5774" = 166 which puts the beam in the
long slender category.
We first note that at the point where the Johnson formula and Euler's formula are tangent, we can relate the stress to
Euler's formula as follows (where C represents the slenderness ratio when the stress is 1/2 the yield stress):
For our particular case, where we have a steel member with a yield stress of 40,000 psi, and a Young's modulus of 30 x
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Columns/cols72.htm (1 of 7)6/29/2005 10:58:57 AM
106 psi., we find C = sqrt(2 * 3.142 * 30 x 106 / 40,000 psi) = 122. If our actual beam has a slenderness ratio greater than
the critical slenderness ratio we may use Eulers formula. If on the other hand our actual slenderness ratio is smaller than
the critical slenderness ratio, we may use the J.B. Johnson Formula.
Example: As an example let us now take a 20 foot long W12 x 58 steel column (made of same steel as above), and
calculate the critical stress using the J.B. Johnson formula. (Beam information and Johnson formula shown below.)
-
thick
Cross
Section
Info.
Cross
Section
Info.
thick x-x axis x-x axis x-x axis y-y axis y-y axis y-y axis
A-in2 d - in wf - in tf - in
tw - in I - in4
S -in3
r - in
I - in4
S -in3
r - in
W 12x58
0.359 476.0
78.1
5.28
107.00
21.40
2.51
For our beam the slenderness ratio = (20 ft * 12 in/ft)/2.51in = 95.6 (where 2.51 in. is the smallest radius of gyration,
about y-y axis). Inserting values we find:
Critical Stress = [ 1 - (95.62/2* 1222)]*40,000 psi. = 27,720 psi. This is the critical stress that would produce buckling.
Note we did not have a safety factor in this problem. As a result we really would not want to load the column to near the
critical stress, but at a lower 'allowable' stress.
The Critical Load will equal the product of the critical stress and the area, or Pcr = 27,720 psi. * 17.10 in2 = 474,012 lb.
VI. The Secant Formula:
Another useful formula is known as the Secant formula. We will not go through the derivation of this relationship, but
focus on its application.
The Secant formula may be used for both axially loaded and eccentrically loaded columns. It may be used with pinnedpinned (Le = L), and with fixed-free (Le = 2L) end columns, but not with other end conditions.
The Secant formula gives the maximum compressive stress in the column as a function of the average axial stress (P/A),
the slenderness ratio (L/r), the eccentricity ratio (ec/r2), and Youngs Modulus for the material.
If, for a given column, the load, P, and eccentricity of the load, e, are known, then the maximum compressive stress can
be calculated. Once we have the maximum compressive stress due to the load, we can compare this stress with the
allowable stress for the material and decide if the column will be able to carry the load.
On the other hand, if we know the allowable compressive stress for the column, we may use the Secant formula to
determine the maximum load we can safely apply to the column. In this case we will be solving for P, and we take note
that the equation is a transcendental equation when solved for P. Thus, the easiest method of solution is to simply try
different values of P, until we find a satisfactory fit. See following example.
Please Select 7.2a: Secant Formula - Example 1
The eccentricity ratio has a normal range from 0 to 3, with most values being less than 1. When the eccentricity value is
zero (corresponding to an axial loading) we have the special case that the maximum load is the critical load:
or
This is one way to look at axial loads. On the other hand a common practice with axially loaded structural steel columns
is to use an eccentricity ratio of .25 to account for the effects of imperfections, etc. Then the allowable stress does not
have to be reduced to account for column imperfections, etc., as this is taken into account in eccentricity ratio.
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Columns/cols72.htm (3 of 7)6/29/2005 10:58:57 AM
Please Select 7.2b: Structural Steel - Example 2 for structural steel example.
Please Select 7.2c: Structural Steel Column Selection - Example 3 for structural steel
example.
2. Aluminum
3. Wood Columns
Please Select 7.2e: Wood Column - Example 5 for wood column example.
VI Short Eccentrically Loaded Columns
An eccentrically loaded short column is shown in the diagram, with the force, P, acting a distance, e, from the centroid of
the column cross sectional area. We may replace the eccentrically acting force, P , with an axial force, P, plus a moment
whose value will be M = P x e. Next we calculate the compressive stress due to the axial force, P, which will simply be P/
A. Then we calculate the bending stress due to the moment P x e, which gives (Pe)c/I where the bending stress will be a
compressive maximum on the right side of the column and a tensile maximum on the left side of the column (and zero at
the centroid). Finally, we add the two stress and obtain Total Maximum Compressive Stress = (P/A)(1 + A e c1/I)
(right side of column), and the Total Minimum Compressive Stress = (P/A)(1 - A e c1/I) (left side of column). And in
fact, if the bending stress is large enough, the left side on the column may be in tension.
thick
Cross
Section
Info.
Cross
Section
Info.
thick x-x axis x-x axis x-x axis y-y axis y-y axis y-y axis
A-in2 d - in wf - in tf - in
tw - in I - in4
S -in3
r - in
I - in4
S -in3
r - in
W 14x74
0.450 797.0
112.0
6.05
133.00
26.50
2.48
or Maximum Compressive Stress = (12, 844 lb/in2)[ 1 + 1.47 sec {(39.7/2)*sqrt (12,844 lb/in2 / 30x 106 lb/in2)}]
= (12, 844 lb/in2)[ 1 + 1.47 (1.09)] = 33,440 lb/in2
We observe that the maximum compressive stress is less than the yield stress, 40,000 psi., thus this column is safe.
A second interesting question is what is the maximum load, P, which would result in a maximum compressive stress
equal to the yield stress. For this we replace the maximum stress with the yield stress in the secant formula, and then
solve the secant formula for the value of P.
Or 40,000 lb/in2 = (P/21.8 in2)[ 1 + 1.47 sec{(39.7/2)sqrt(P/(30 x106 lb/in2 * 21.8 in2))}]
Or simplifying a bit we have: 872,000 lb = P[1 + 1.47 sec {(19.85)sqrt(P/6.54 x 108 lb)}]
This is a transcendental equation, and perhaps the most effective way to solve at this level is to guess solutions until
We first try a value of P somewhat greater than the original. Let P = 350,000 lb.
Then we have: 872,000 lb. = 350,000 lb. [1 + 1.47 sec {(19.85)sqrt(350,000 lb./6.54 x 108 lb.)}] or
872,000 lb. = 923,960 lb. (which is clearly not correct, our value of P is somewhat high, so we try again.
Let P = 330,000 lb., then 872,000 lb. = 330,000 lb. [1 + 1.47 sec {(19.85)sqrt(330,000 lb./6.54 x 108 lb.)}],
or 872,000 lb. = 867,700 lb. Here we see we are quite close. So a load of 330,000 pounds will be very close to
Designation Area
Width
thick
thick
tw -
x-x
axis
I - in4
S -in3
x-x
axis
x-x
axis
A-in2 d - in wf - in tf - in
WT15x66
19.40 15.15 10.551 1.000 0.615 24.60 421.00 37.400 4.650 3.900
in
d/tw
r - in y - in
We will first do this problem assuming that radius of gyration is lowest about the X-X
Axis, and buckling will occur first with respect to that axis. Calculating the slenderness
ratio = Le/r = (2*12ft * 12"/ft)/4.65 = 61.94
Next we calculate the critical slenderness ratio Cc2 = ( 2 * 3.142 * 30 x 106 lb/
in2 /38,000 lb/in2) = 15568; and C = 124.8. Since the slenderness ratio of the
column is less than the critical slenderness ratio, we use the intermediate formula to
find the allowable stress.
Before we can determine the allowable stress, we first calculate the factor of safety.
FS = (5/3) + (3/8)(61.94/124.8) - (1/8)(61.94/124.8)3 = 1.84.
Then Allowable Stress = (38,000/1.84)[1 - (1/2)(61.94/124.8)2] = 18,110
lb/in2.
Finally the allowable load = Stress * Area = 18,110 lb/in2 * 19.4 in2 =
351,334 lb.
PART 2: Repeat if the column is 20 ft long.
We again assume that radius of gyration is lowest about the X-X Axis, and buckling
will occur first with respect to that axis. Calculating the slenderness ratio = Le/r
= (2*20ft * 12"/ft)/4.65 in = 103.2
Next we calculate the critical slenderness ratio Cc2 = ( 2 * 3.142 * 30 x 106 lb/
in2 /38,000 lb/in2) = 15568; and C = 124.8. Since the slenderness ratio of the
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Columns/colse72b.htm (2 of 3)6/29/2005 10:59:15 AM
column is less than the critical slenderness ratio, we use the formula for intermediate
columns to find the allowable stress. However, before we can determine the allowable
stress, we must first calculate the factor of safety.
FS = (5/3) + (3/8)(103.2/124.8) - (1/8)(103.2/124.8)3 = 1.91
Then Allowable Stress = (38,000/1.91)[1 -(1/2)(103.2/124.8)2] = 13,090
lb/in2
Finally the Allowable Load = Stress * Area = 13,090 lb/in2 * 19.4 in2 =
253,946 lb.
Notice how much the change in length has reduced the allowable load.
Return to:Topic 7.2: Columns & Buckling - II
Continue to:Topic 7.2c: Structural Steel Column Selection - Example 3
or Select:
Topic 7: Columns & Pressure Vessels - Table of Content
Strength of Materials Home Page
Next we choose (guess) a beam with an area greater than the minimum area
found in step 1. From our table we will try a W10 x 21, which has an area of 6.2
in2 and a minimum radius of gyration of 1.32 in. The Slenderness ratio for
this column = Le/r = (.7*16' * 12"/ft)/ 1.32 in. = 101.8. We also calculate
the critical slenderness ratio Cc2 = ( 2 * 3.142 * 30 x 106 lb/in2 /34,000 lb/
in2) = 17417; and C = 132 Since the slenderness ratio of the column is less
than the critical slenderness ratio, we use formula for intermediate columns to find
the allowable stress.
Before we can determine the allowable stress, we first calculate the factor of
safety. FS = (5/3) + (3/8)(101.8/132) - (1/8)(101.8/132)3 = 1.9. Then
the Allowable Stress = (34,000/1.9)[1 - (1/2)(101.8/132)2] = 10,994 lb/
in2
Finally the Allowable Load = Stress * Area = 10,994 lb/in2 * 6.2 in2 =
68,165 lb.
We notice that the allowable load is about half of the load we would like to apply.
This means we need an I-beam with a larger area and/or a larger radius of
gyration. So we now select a larger cross section beam, and repeat steps 2, 3, and
4.
From our table we will try a W10 x 33, which has an area of 9.71 in2 and a
minimum radius of gyration of 1.94 in. The Slenderness ratio for this
column = Le/r = (.7*16' * 12"/ft)/ 1.94 in. = 69.3. The critical slenderness
ratio remains the same [Cc2 = ( 2 * 3.142 * 30 x 106 lb/in2 /34,000 lb/in2) =
17417; and C = 132] Since the slenderness ratio of the column is less than the
critical slenderness ratio, we use the formula for intermediate columns to find the
allowable stress.
Before we can determine the allowable stress, we first calculate the factor of
safety. FS = (5/3) + (3/8)(69.3/132) - (1/8)(69.3/132)3 = 1.85. Then the
Allowable Stress = (34,000/1.85)[1 - (1/2)(69.3/132)2] = 15,845 lb/in2.
Finally the Allowable Load = Stress * Area = 15,845 lb/in2 * 9.71 in2 =
153,855 lb. We notice that the allowable load is somewhat higher than the load
we would like to apply. This means, of course, that this I-beam would work, but it
is probably not the best (lightest). So we make one more guess/estimate. We
need a beam with a slightly lower area and/or radius of gyration.
From our table we will try a W12 x 31, which has area of 9.13 in2 and a
minimum radius of gyration of 1.54 in. The Slenderness ratio for this
column = Le/r = (.7*16' * 12"/ft)/ 1.54 in. = 87.3. The critical slenderness
ratio remains the same [Cc2 = ( 2 * 3.142 * 30 x 106 lb/in2 /34,000 lb/in2) =
17417; and C = 132] Since the slenderness ratio of the column is less than the
critical slenderness ratio, we use the formula for intermediate columns to find the
allowable stress.
Before we can determine the allowable stress, we first calculate the factor of
safety. FS = (5/3) + (3/8)(87.3/132) - (1/8)(87.3/132)3 = 1.88. Then the
Allowable Stress = (34,000/1.88)[1 - (1/2)(87.3/132)2] = 14,130 lb/in2
Finally the Allowable Load = Stress * Area = 14,130 lb/in2 * 9.13 in2 =
129,000 lb. Here we see our maximum allowable load is just slightly above the
load we would like to apply, (120,000 lb.). This beam is a very good candidate for
the best beam. It might be possible to find a slightly better beam, but we will end
here.
There are other design procedures for selecting columns than the one above. Most
of these also utilize a trial and error type of procedure. However, with computers
and spreadsheets today, it is not a hard process to develop a program to try a
number of different columns and arrive at the best one in a short time.
Return to:Topic7.2: Columns & Buckling - II
Continue to:Topic 7.2d: Aluminum Columns - Example 4
or Select:
Topic 7: Columns & Pressure Vessels - Table of Content
Strength of Materials Home Page
We first wish to determine the slenderness ratio, however we need the minimum
radius of gyration, which may be calculated from r = (I/A)1/2, where I is taken
about the axis which gives the smallest value.
In this case that would be about a vertical y-y axis through the center of the cross
section, resulting in the following value: I = (1/12)[bodo3 bidi3] = (1/12)
[8"*4"3 7"*3"3] = 26.9 in4. Additionally, the area = bodo bidi = 32 in2
21 in2 = 11 in2. Then r = (I/A)1/2 = 1.56 in. And slenderness ratio = Le/r =
(.5*10' * 12"/ft)/1.56in. = 38.4
Since the slenderness ratio is greater than 12 and less then 55, we use the
appropriate formula (for Alclad) for intermediate columns. The Allowable Stress
= [30.7- .23(Le/r)] ksi. = 21.87 ksi. = 21,870 lb/in2.
Finally the Allowable Load = Stress * Area = 21,870 lb/in2 * 11 in2 =
240,570 lb.
Return to:Topic 7.2: Columns & Buckling - II
Continue to:Topic 7.2e: Wood Columns - Example 5
or Select:
Topic 7: Columns & Pressure Vessels - Table of Content
We first wish to determine the slenderness ratio we use slenderness ratio = Le/
d = (.5*25' * 12"/ft)/ 5 in. = 30.
We next need to calculate the transition slenderness ratio, k = .671 sqrt(E/
allowable compressive stress along grain) = .671 sqrt(1.3 x 106 lb/in2 / 6
x 103 lb/in2) = 9.88
Since the column's slenderness ratio is greater than k, we use the appropriate
formula (for wood) for long slender columns. The Allowable Stress = [.3E/(Le/
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Columns/colse72e.htm (1 of 2)6/29/2005 10:59:32 AM
1. A 10 foot long wood beam, nominally 2" by 4" (actual 1.5" by 3.5"), is used as
a pinned-pinned column. Determine the slenderness ratio, and the Euler Buckling
load for this column. Young's modulus is 1.8 x 10 6 lb/in2, and the allowable yield
2. A 16 foot long wood beam, nominally 4" by 8" (actual 3.5" by 7.25"), is used
as a fixed - pinned column. Determine the slenderness ratio, and the Euler
Buckling load for this column. Young's modulus is 2 x 10 6 lb/in2, and the
Determine the slenderness ratio, the Euler Buckling load, and the axial stress
when the Euler Buckling load is applied. Young's modulus is 30 x 10 6 lb/in2, and
4. A wood yard stick has dimensions, length = 36", width = 2", thickness = 3/8".
If one end of the year stick is held fixed and a person pushes on the other end,
what force will cause the yard stick to fail in Euler buckling. Assume both fixed-
free, and fixed - pinned columns and compare your answers. Use a Young's
[ a. 32,950 lb (2790 psi), b. 67100 lb. (5680 psi), c. 8200 lb. (695 psi), d.
6. Select the best (safe & lightest) structural steel wide flange I-beam (from web
load of 120,000 lb. Young's modulus is 30 x 10 6 lb/in2 , and the allowable yield
stress is 36 x 10
(W8x31)
lb/in2 .
Select:
Topic 6: Columns & Pressure Vessels - Table of Content
Statics & Strength of Materials Home Page
Determine a) the slenderness ratio; b) the Euler buckling load; c) the axial stress in the column
The radius of gyration of hollow circular area: r = [sqrt (do2 + di2)] / 4 ; Moment of Inertia: I =
2. A 20 foot long WT 12 x 42 steel T-beam is used as a fixed - free column. Determine the
slenderness ratio, the Euler Buckling load, and the axial stress when the Euler Buckling load is
applied. Young's modulus is 30 x 10 6 lb/in2. [radius of gryration about y-y axis = 1.95";
moment of inertia about y-y axis = 47.2 in4; area = 12.4 in2]
3. A W 8x40 aluminum 6061 -T6 alloy I-beam is used as a pinned-pinned column. Determine the
A-in2
d - in wf - in tf - in
8.077
tw - in Ixx - in4
0.558 0.365
146.0
Sxx
in3
35.5
49.00
12.10
2.04
4. Select the best (safe and lightest) structural streel I-beam to be used as a pinned-pinned
column of length 20 feet which is to carry a load of 60,000 lb. The yield stress of the steel is
36,000 psi. (See tables below)
[More than one beam may work well. The W12 x 36 gives a maximum load of 68,000 lb, with an
allowable buckling stress of 6,420 psi for the 20 ft beam with a allow steel stress of 36,000 psi.]
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Columns/cols74.htm (1 of 3)6/29/2005 10:59:44 AM
Designation
Area
wf
tf
tw
in2
in
in
in
in
W 5x18.5
5.43
5.12
5.025
W 6x16
4.72
6.25
W 6x25
7.35
W 8x67
19.70
W 10x29
8.54
W 10x45
W 12x22
W 12x36
-
Cross
Section Info.
Cross
Section Info.
x-x
axis
x-x
axis
y-y axis
y-y
axis
y-y
axis
in4
in3
in
in4
in3
in
0.420 0.265
25.4
9.9
2.16
8.89
3.54
1.28
4.030
0.404 0.260
31.7
10.2
2.59
4.42
2.19
0.97
6.37
6.080
0.456 0.320
53.3
16.7
2.69
17.10
5.62
1.53
9.00
8.287
0.933 0.575
272.0
60.4
3.71
88.60
21.40
2.12
10.22 5.799
0.500 0.289
158.0
30.8
4.30
16.30
5.61
1.38
0.618 0.350
249.0
49.1
4.33
53.20
13.30
2.00
12.31 4.030
0.424 0.260
156.0
25.3
4.91
4.64
2.31
0.85
0.540 0.305
281.0
46.0
5.15
25.50
7.77
1.55
I - in4
S -in3
r - in
I - in4
6.47
A-in2
Depth Width
d - in wf - in
thick
tf - in
tw in
S -in3 r - in
W 14x38
0.513 0.313
386.0
54.7
5.88
26.60
7.86
1.54
W 14x74
797.0
112.0
6.05
133.00
26.50
2.48
216.0
6.31
568.00
77.00
3.77
707.0
W 14x136
W 16x50
W 16x96
0.628 0.380
80.8
6.68
37.10
10.50
1.59
166.0
6.93
224.00
38.80
2.82
W 18x60
0.695 0.416
108.0
7.47
50.10
13.30
1.68
W 21x73
151.0
8.64
70.60
17.00
1.81
657.0
986.0
W 24x94
221.0
9.86
108.00
23.90
1.98
31.60
2.18
W 27x114
W 33x240
70.60 33.50 15.865 1.400 0.830 13600.0 813.0 13.90 933.00 118.00 3.64
W 36x300
88.30 36.72 16.655 1.680 0.945 20300.0 1110.0 15.20 1300.00 156.00 3.83
Select:
Topic 7: Columns & Pressure Vessels - Table of Content
Strength of Materials Home Page
The longitudinal stress may be found by equating the force due to internal gas/
fluid pressure with the force due to the longitudinal stress as follows:
(A'); or P(3.1416 * R2) =
(2 * 3.1416 * R * t), then canceling
P(A) =
terms and solving for the longitudinal stress, we have:
= P R / 2 t ; where
P = internal pressure in cylinder; R = radius of cylinder, t = wall thickness
To determine the relationship for the transverse stress, often called the hoop
stress, we use the same approach, but first cut the cylinder lengthwise as shown
in Diagram 2.
We once again equate the force on the cylinder section wall due to the internal
pressure with the resistive force which develops in walls and may be expressed in
. The effective area the internal pressure acts on may
terms of the hoop stress,
be consider to be the flat cross section given by (2*R*L). So we may write:
(A'); or P(2*R*L) =
(2*t*L), then canceling terms and solving
P(A) =
for the hoop stress, we have:
= P R / t ; where
P = internal pressure in cylinder; R = radius of cylinder, t = wall thickness
We note that the hoop stress is twice the value of the longitudinal stress, and is
normally the limiting factor. The vessel does not have to be a perfect cylinder. In
any thin wall pressure vessel in which the pressure is uniform and which has a
cylindrical section, the stress in the cylindrical section is given by the relationships
above.
Example A: A thin wall pressure vessel is shown in Diagram 3. It's cylindrical
section has a radius of 2 feet, and a wall thickness of the 1". The internal pressure
is 500 lb/in2. Determine the longitudinal and hoop stresses in the cylindrical region.
Next we consider the stress in thin wall spherical pressure vessels. Using the
approach as in cylindrical vessels, in Diagram 4 we have shown a half section of a
spherical vessel. If we once again equal the force due to the internal pressure with
the resistive force expressed in term of the stress, we have:
3. Calculate the internal water pressure that will burst a 15 in. diameter cast-iron
water pipe if the wall thickness is 1/2 in. Use an ultimate tensile strength of
62,500 psi. for the pipe. (8333 psi)
4. Calculate the wall thickness required for a 5 ft. diameter cylindrical steel tank
containing gas at an internal gage pressure of 600 psi. The allowable tensile
stress for the steel is 17,500 psi. (1.03")
8. A thin wall pressure vessel is composed of two spherical regions and is shown in
Diagram 4. The larger spherical region has a radius of 3 ft , and the smaller
spherical region has a radius of 2.5 ft. The vessel is made of steel with an
allowable tensile stress of 24,000 lb/in2.
1. Copper water pipe in a house is 1.5 inches in diameter with 1/16 inch walls. The
allowable tensile stress in the copper is 8000 psi. Determine the maximum pressure
that the pipes can withstand. (667 psi)
2. A plastic garden hose has an inside diameter of 3/4 inch and a wall thickness of
3/16 inch. Determine the stress in the plastic when the hose is filled with water at
50 psi. (200 psi.)
3. Determine the speed of the water in the hose in problem 2 if it is used to fill a
five gallon pail in one minute. (one gallon is 231 cubic inches) Express the speed in
feet per second and convert to miles per hour if you can. (3.65 ft/sec = 2.49 mi/hr)
7. A water tank is 60 feet in diameter and 45 feet high. It is made of 1/2 inch steel
plate with single cover plate riveted joints. Determine the number of 3/4 inch
diameter rivets needed to secure the joint. Assume that the allowable tensile
strength of the steel is 15,000 psi. and that the allowable shear stress in the rivets
is 12,000 psi. [Hoop stress in steel ~ 15,000 psi (depends a little on assumptions),
F = Stress * A = 4.05 x 106 lb, f/rivet = 5300 lb/rivet; # rivet/vertical seam = 764
x 2 =1528]
8. An air compressor used for a nail gun has a diameter of 8 inches and is charged
to a pressure of 250 psi. The tank is made of welded 1/8 inch steel. Determine the
tensile stress in the tank. The ends of the tank are welded to the cylindrical body.
Determine the force acting on the tank ends that the weld must withstand. [ hoop =
8000 psi; Fend = 12, 570 lb]
9. A propane tank used for home heating has a diameter of 4 feet. The allowable
tensile stress in the steel of the tank is 12,000 psi. Determine the required
thickness of the tank. Propane has the following vapor pressures. [ t 1atm = .0294
in; t
40atm
= 1.176 in]
P
T
1 atm, -40 F
2 atm, -14 F
5 atm, 34.5 F
10 atm, 80 F
20 atm, 137 F
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Columns/colsp76b.htm (5 of 6)6/29/2005 11:00:21 AM
40 atm, 203 F
Select:
Topic 7: Columns & Pressure Vessels - Table of Content
Strength of Materials Home Page
Test page
thick
Cross
Section
Info.
Cross
Section
Info.
thick x-x axis x-x axis x-x axis y-y axis y-y axis y-y axis
A-in2 d - in wf - in tf - in
tw - in I - in4
S -in3
r - in
I - in4
S -in3
r - in
W 10x29
8.54
0.289 158.0
30.8
4.30
16.30
5.61
1.38
10.22 5.799
0.500
3. Copper water pipe in a house is 1.5 inches in diameter with 1/16 inch walls. The allowable
tensile stress in the copper is 8000 psi. Determine the maximum pressure that the pipes can
withstand.
4. Select the best (safe and lightest) structural steel I-beam to be used as a fixed-free column
of length 16 feet which is to carry a load of 300,000 lb. The yield stress of the steel is 42,000
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/Columns/cols76c.htm (1 of 3)6/29/2005 11:00:31 AM
Test page
Depth Width
Designation
Area
in2
W 5x18.5
thick
Section
Info.
thick x-x axis x-x axis x-x axis y-y axis y-y axis
y-y
axis
w
f
t
f
t
w
in
in
in
in
5.43
5.12
5.025
W 6x16
4.72
6.25
W 6x25
7.35
W 8x67
19.70
W 10x29
8.54
Cross
Section
Info.
Cross
in4
in3
in
in4
in3
in
0.420 0.265
25.4
9.9
2.16
8.89
3.54
1.28
4.030
0.404 0.260
31.7
10.2
2.59
4.42
2.19
0.97
6.37
6.080
0.456 0.320
53.3
16.7
2.69
17.10
5.62
1.53
9.00
8.287
0.933 0.575
272.0
60.4
3.71
88.60
21.40
2.12
10.22 5.799
0.500 0.289
158.0
30.8
4.30
16.30
5.61
1.38
0.618 0.350
249.0
49.1
4.33
53.20
13.30
2.00
12.31 4.030
0.424 0.260
156.0
25.3
4.91
4.64
2.31
0.85
W 12x36
0.540 0.305
281.0
46.0
5.15
25.50
7.77
1.55
W 14x38
0.513 0.313
386.0
54.7
5.88
26.60
7.86
1.54
W 14x74
797.0
112.0
6.05
133.00
26.50
2.48
W 14x136
216.0
6.31
568.00
77.00
3.77
707.0
7.26
80.8
6.68
37.10
10.50
1.59
W 10x45
W 12x22
6.47
0.628 0.380
657.0
2360.00 283.00
4.34
W 16x50
W 16x96
166.0
6.93
224.00
38.80
2.82
W 18x60
0.695 0.416
108.0
7.47
50.10
13.30
1.68
W 21x73
151.0
8.64
70.60
17.00
1.81
986.0
Test page
W 24x94
221.0
9.86
108.00
23.90
1.98
W 27x114
300.0
11.00
159.00
31.60
2.18
W 33x240
813.0
13.90
933.00
118.00
3.64
W 36x300
1300.00 156.00
3.83
Select:
Topic 7: Columns & Pressure Vessels - Table of Content
Strength of Materials Home Page
15.20
Solution:
We first apply static equilibrium conditions to the beam and determine the
external support reactions, and the external moment acting on the beam at point
A. Notice we have resolved the 10,000 lb. load into its perpendicular x and y
components. The horizontal component of the load (9,400 lb.) produces a normal
horizontal axial stress in the beam. The vertical component of the load (-3,420
lb.) causes a torque about point A (13,700 ft-lb) to act on the beam (balanced
by the external moment). The resulting internal bending moment(s) in the beam
produces an axial bending stress. The total axial stress at a point in the beam
will be the sum of the normal axial stress and the axial bending stress.
The Normal Axial Stress = Force/Area = 9,400 lb. / (2" x 4") = 1175 lb/
in2. We note that this stress will be tensile and constant through out the length of
the beam. So the maximum normal Axial Stress is 1175 lb/in2, and is the same
everywhere in the beam.
The maximum bending stress occurs at the outer edge of the beam, and at the
point in the beam where the bending moment is a maximum. In the cantilever
beam, the maximum bending moment occurs at the wall and is equal to the
(negative of) external bending moment. (M = -13,700 ft-lb. = -164,400 in-lb.)
We can then calculate the maximum bending moment by:
Maximum Bending Stress = M y/I = (164,400 in-lb.)(2")/(10.67 in4) =
30,820 lb/in2.
Since the bending moment was negative, this means that the top of the beam
(above the centroid) is in tension, and the bottom on the beam is in compression.
We can now combine (sum) the axial stress at the very top and bottom of the
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/spec1/spec81.htm (2 of 3)6/29/2005 11:00:55 AM
beam to determine the maximum axial stress. We see in the beam section in
Diagram 2, that the stresses at the top of the beam are both tensile, and so add
to a total tensile stress of 30,820 lb./in2 + 1,175 lb./in2 = 31,995 lb./in2.
At the bottom of the beam, the bending stress is compressive and the normal
axial stress in tensile so the resultant bottom stress is - 30,820 lb./in2 + 1,175
lb./in2 = -29,645 lb./in2 (compression).
Solution:
We first apply static equilibrium to the beam and determine the external support
reactions acting on the beam at point A.
Sum of Forcex = Ax - T cos 25o = 0
Sum of TorqueA = -6,000 lb (10ft) + T cos 25o (2.8 ft.) = 0 (where 2.8 ft.
= distance from A to D)
Solving: T = 23,640 lb.; Ax = 21,430 lb., and Ay = -3990 lb. (Ay acts
downward)
We next draw the Shear Force and Bending Moment Diagrams, and use the
Bending Moment Diagram to determine the Maximum Bending Stress in the beam.
(See Diagram 2.)
We next will consider the axial stress due to the horizontal force acting on the
21,430 lb. (Due to the force Ax and the horizontal component of the force in rod
DB.) For beam section BC, there is no horizontal axial force due to an external
experiencing normal horizontal stress, since it is to the right of where the support
rod is attached. (However, there is a horizontal bending stress due to the bending
moment, which is in turn due to the vertical loads being applied. This will be
considered in a moment.)
F/A = 21,430 lb. / 7.08 in2 = 3,030 lb/in2. (We have considered the force to
There is a bending stress also acting in the beam. The maximum bending stress
occurs at the outer edge of the beam, and at the point in the beam where the
bending moment is a maximum. From our bending moment diagram, we see that
the maximum bending moment occurs at 6 feet from the left end, and has a value
of -24,000 ft-lb. = -288,000 in-lb. ( The negative sign indicating that the top of
the beam is in tension and the bottom of the beam is in compression.) We can
then calculate the maximum bending moment by: Maximum Bending Stress =
M / S Where S is the section modulus for the beam. In this example S = 20.9 in3.
Then:
Since the bending moment was negative, the top of the I-Beam will be in tension,
Return to:
Topic 8.1: Combined Stress
or select:
Topic 8: Special Topics I - Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
In this example, a solid 1 foot long shaft is attached to a wall at point A, and has a
disk attached at end B. A force of 1000 lb. is applied to the outer edge of the disk,
as shown. We would like to determine the maximum shear stress in the shaft.
We first consider the static equilibrium conditions. The 1000 lb. force acting on the
outside edge of the disk produces a torque of 2000 in-lb. with respect to the
center (centroid) of the shaft. Additionally it also effectively exerts a 1000 lb. force
perpendicular to the shaft. It can be considered to produce a torque and a force
acting at the centroid, as shown in the box in Diagram 1.
In response to this, a torque and perpendicular force develops in the supporting
wall, such that the shaft is in translational and rotational equilibrium. (Notice also
that an external moment develops at the wall, since the shaft is also acting as a
cantilevered beam. An axial bending stress will also develop in the beam, but we
will not consider this at this point, since we are concerned with the total shear
stress in the beam.)
The internal torque in the shaft produces transverse shearing stress. The
perpendicular forces produce an internal shearing force in the shaft, which also
produces a shear stress. The two stresses may be summed to find the maximum
shear stress in the shaft.
Maximum Transverse Shear Stress = Tr/J = (2000 in-lb.) * (1") / (pi *
d4/32) = (2000 in-lb.)*(1") / (3.1416 * 2"4/32) = 1,270 lb/in2.
Maximum Horizontal Shear Stress = Vay'/Ib = (4/3) V/A This last is the
expression for the maximum horizontal (and vertical) shear stress in a circular
cross section beam. The derivation for this is a bit messy, so the result will simply
be stated here. (The student is referred to a complete Strength of Materials Text
for the derivation.)
Maximum Horizontal Shear Stress = (4/3)V/A = (4/3) (1000 lb.)/3.1416
* 2"2/4) = 424 lb/in2.
We can now sum the two shear stresses to determine the maximum shear stress
in the shaft. In Diagram 2 and Diagram 3, we have shown a section of the shaft,
and cross sectional views showing the directions of the two shear stresses.
As we can see from the diagram, at the top the cross sections the two stresses
add giving the result of 1,270 lb/in2 + 424 lb/in2 = 1,694 lb/in2.
This is the maximum shear stress in the shaft.
Return to:
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/spec1/spece81b.htm (2 of 3)6/29/2005 11:01:07 AM
We can then write the axial and shear stress on the inclined area as follows:
Axial Stress = F cos (theta) / A /cos (theta) = (F/A) cos2(theta)
Shear Stress = F sin (theta) / A /cos (theta) = (F/A) sin(theta) * cos
(theta)
or, using a trigonometric identity, we can rewrite the shear stress as
Shear Stress = (F/2A)Sin (2*theta), and finally writing symbolically, and in
terms of the normal stress on the rectangular area, we have:
; and
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/spec1/spec82.htm (1 of 3)6/29/2005 11:01:14 AM
where these relationships allow us to calculate the axial and shear stress on an
incline plane section at an angle theta.
From our relationships we can determine the maximum stresses. The maximum
axial stress is just the initial normal stress on the rectangular cross section = F/A.
The maximum shear stress occurs at theta = 45o, and is equal to F/(2A), which is
half of the maximum axial stress. We now look at a simple example of this
application.
Example
In Diagram 2, we have shown a square, 2" by 2", section in tension with a normal
force of 2000 lb. acting on each end. We would like to know the axial and shear
stress on a 30o incline plane cut through the section.
As shown in Diagram 2, we first calculate the normal stress on the square cross
section, and find Normal Stress (sigma) = 500 lb/in2. We next apply the our
formula for axial and shear stress on an incline plane (again, as shown in Diagram
2), and find that the normal axial stress on the 30o incline plane is 375 lb/in2,
and the shear stress on the 30o incline plane is 217 lb/in2.
Up to this point we have considered a section with an axial stress only in one
direction. We will shortly look at the general case where we have several axial and
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/spec1/spec82.htm (2 of 3)6/29/2005 11:01:14 AM
shear stresses acting. We will wish to determine what are called the principal
stresses and the principal planes.
Continue to:
Topic 8.3: Special Topics I - Non-Axial Loads
or select:
Topic 8: Special Topics I - Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
Example: In Diagram 2a, we have shown a 2" by 2" structural element with a
tensile force of 5000 lb. applied at the edge of the element as shown. In Diagram
2b, we have replaced the 5000 lb. edge force with a 5000 lb. force acting at the
centroid of the element and a moment about the centroid of 5000 lb. * 1" = 5000
in-lb.
We next determine the normal axial stress and the bending stress on the top cross
sectional area. The normal axial stress is given by:
= F/A = 5000 lb./(2"x 2") = 250 lb/in2.
And the bending stress is given by:
= My/I = 5000 in-lb.* 1" /[(1/12)2"*2"3] = 3750 lb/in2. Where for y we
have used the maximum distance from the neutral axis to the outer edge of the
area, giving us the maximum bending stress. In Diagram 3a we have shown the
normal stress distribution on the area. In Diagram 3b we have shown the bending
stress distribution along one edge (it is the same across rest of the area). From
the direction of stresses we see that they add along the front side of the element
face, and subtract along the back side the element. We can then find the
maximum axial stress from:
Maximum Axial Stress = 250 lb/in2 + 3750 lb/in2 = 4000 lb/in2.
Continue to:
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/spec1/spec83.htm (2 of 3)6/29/2005 11:01:21 AM
In Diagram 2 we have shown the structure element with a plane cut through it at
calculate the value of these two stress for any arbitrary plane section.
In Diagram 2b, we have shown a triangular element with axial and shear stresses
shown. If we multiply these stresses by the appropriate areas, we have the forces
on each surface. We may then apply static equilibrium conditions and write the
equilibrium equations. Before we do so, we need to establish a sign convention as
follows:
= magnitude of
The two equation above may be solved for two "unknowns". In this case we solve
for , and ; the stresses acting on the incline plane shown in Diagram 2. The
details of solving these two simultaneous equations involve a number of
trigonometric identities and some extended algebraic manipulations, and will not
be presented. The results of this process are as follows:
and
Example. In Diagram 3 a structural element is shown with axial and shear stress
given by: normal x-stress = 4000 lb/in2, normal y-stress = 3000 lb/in2, shear
stress = 1000 lb/in2. We would like to find the principal planes, the principal
stresses, and the maximum shear stress.
We first apply the formula for determining the angle of the principal planes:
2, then
2(theta) = 63.4o, and 243.4o, and theta = 31.7o, and 121.7o. These are the
angles of the principal planes. We will calculate the principal stress two ways. First
from the general formula for plane stresses
= (4000 lb/in2 + 3000 lb/
Note that we arrive at the same result by both methods. And finally we calculate
the maximum shear stress from:
= Sqrt[{(4000 lb/in2 - 3000 lb/in2)/2}2 +
Solution:
We first review briefly the static equilibrium conditions for the shaft. The applied
torque of 2000 lb/in2 at end B is balance by an equal torque which develops in the
wall acting on the shaft. The applied horizontal force of 20,000 lb. also applied at
end B is balance by an equal 20,000 lb. force which the wall exerts on the shaft.
Thus the shaft is in equilibrium. (We have ignored any weight of the shaft.)
We next determine the axial (normal) stress due to the applied 20,000 lb. force by:
= F/A = 20,000 lb. / (3.1416 * 1"2) in2 = 6,370 lb/in2. (We assume
lb/in2.
We next show a shaft element with these values indicated in Diagram 2. Also
remembering our sign conventions, shown below.
1. Tensile Stress will be considered positive, and Compressive Stresses
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/spec1/spece84a.htm (1 of 3)6/29/2005 11:01:38 AM
We first apply the formula for determining the angle of the principal planes:
with coordinates (
) as shown in Diagram 2. [According to our sign
from
angle.
We will now work a Mohr's Circle example.
Example. In Diagram 3 a structural element is shown with axial and shear stress
of normal x-stress = 4000 lb/in2, normal y-stress = 3000 lb/in2, shear stress =
1000 lb/in2. We would like to find the principal planes, principal stresses, and the
maximum shear stress.
We begin by drawing Mohr's Circle for this problem. Point A (+4000 lb/in2, +1000
lb/in2), and Point B (3000 lb/in2 , -1000 lb/in2) are drawn and connected. We also
calculate the radius of the circle from
= {[(4000 lb/in2 -3000 lb/in2)/2]2 + (1000 lb/
R=
in2)2}1/2
R = 1118 lb/in2. This value is also the value of the maximum shear stress as we
see from Mohr's Circle.
We next calculate the location of the center of Mohr's Circle = (4000 lb/in2
+3000 lb/in2)/2 = 3500 lb/in2. We then use the value of the radius and the
location of the center of the circle to find the principal stresses. From Mohr's Circle
we see that:
Continue to:
Topic 8.6 Special Topics I - Problem Assignment 1
or select:
Topic 8: Special Topics I - Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page
The beam has a load of 8,000 lb. acting downward at point C and a second load of
10,000 lb. acting downward at point B. The supporting rod makes an angle of 25o
with respect to the beam. The beam cross section is a W8 x 24 I-Beam, with the
characteristics shown in Diagram 1.
Determine the maximum axial stress acting in the beam cross section and state
where it occurs. [25,400 psi @ x = 6' at bottom of beam, compression]
A force of 20,000 lb. is applied at the centroid of the beam, at an angle of 30o with
respect to the horizontal as shown in the Diagram. The beam cross section is a
WT12 x 34 T-Beam, with the characteristics shown in Diagram 2.
Determine the maximum axial stress acting in the beam cross section and state
where it occurs. [20,192 psi @ x = 6' at bottom of beam, tension]
3. As shown in Diagram 3, a solid 1 foot long shaft with a radius of 1" is attached
to a wall at point A, and has a disk with a radius of 2" attached at end B.
A force of 2000 lb. is applied to the outer edge of the disk, as shown.
Determine the maximum shear stress in the shaft, and state where it acts.
[849 psi + 2,546 psi = 3,395 psi at top of beam]
Determine the axial and shear stress on a 35o incline plane cut through the
section.[axial 1,342 psi., shear 940 psi.]
Determine principal planes, the principal stresses, and the maximum shear stress.
[16.8o, 106.8o, axial max 6,606 psi.,axial min -606 psi., shear = 3606 psi.]
Also determine the axial and shear stresses on a plane which makes an angle of
37 degrees counterclockwise from the negative vertical axis in the given element.
[axial 5750 psi., shear -2235 psi.]
2. A structural element with given axial and shear stresses is shown in Diagram 2.
Determine principal planes, the principal stresses, and the maximum shear stress.
[41.4o, 131.4o, axial max 9,530 psi.,axial min -1,470 psi., shear = 4030 psi.]
Also determine the axial and shear stresses on a plane which makes an angle of
60 degrees counterclockwise from the negative vertical axis in the given element.
[axial 8714 psi., shear -2433 psi.]
http://physics.uwstout.edu/statstr/Strength/spec1/specp87.htm (1 of 3)6/29/2005 11:01:57 AM
Determine the principal planes, principal stresses and the maximum shear stress
for a structural element on the outer edge of the shaft. (We will assume that the
[56.3o, 146.3o, axial max 6,112 psi.,axial min -2,716 psi., shear = 4,414 psi.]
4. A loaded cantilever beam is shown in Diagram 4. The beam cross section is a 2"
by 2" square.
Determine the principal planes, principal stresses, and maximum shear stress on a
structural element 1/2 foot from the wall, and at point P in the cross sectional
[2.4o, 92.4o, axial max 20,285 psi.,axial min -35 psi., shear = 10,160 psi.]
A force of 18,000 lb. is applied at the centroid of the beam, at an angle of 37o with
respect to the horizontal as shown in the Diagram. The beam cross section is a
rectangular 2" by 4".
Determine the maximum axial stress acting in the beam cross section and state
where it occurs.
[(38880 psi + 1800 psi = 40680 psi. compression, at top of beam 8 ft from left
end) This is considering only sum of axial stress acting. If one takes a small
section at point indicated and finds principle stresses, the principle axis stress in
slightly greater, ~ 41,000 psi @ 4.6o angle off vertical plane.]
At end B a 8,000 lb. horizontal force is applied in the vertical center, but at the far
outside edge as shown in Diagram 5. A second 6,000 lb. horizontal force is
applied at the horizontal center of the beam, but at the top edge of the area as
shown in Diagram 5. The beam cross section is a 2" by 3" rectangle.
Determine the maximum axial stress in the beam, and state where it acts.
[(2333 psi + 3000 psi + 4000 psi = 9333 psi, tension at top right corner of cross
section. Again considering only combined axial stresses. There are two points of
zero axial stress in cross section. One would be on horizontal neutral axis .583" to
left of center point (2333 psi (t) + 0 + 2333 psi (c) = 0), and the other on the
vertical axis 1.167" below the center point of cross section (2333 psi (t) + 2333
psi (c) + 0 = 0)]
3. A structural element with applied axial and shear stresses is shown in Diagram
3.
Determine principal planes, the principal stresses, and the maximum shear stress.
(-22.5o, +67.5o, 10,485 psi, -6485 psi, +/- 8485 psi)
Also determine the axial and shear stresses on a plane which makes an angle of
40 degrees counterclockwise from the negative vertical axis in the given element.
(6867 psi, 6951 psi)
Select:
Topic 8: Special Topics I - Table of Contents
Strength of Materials Home Page